Skip to main content

Madhya-lila · Chapter 16

The Lord’s Attempt to Go to Vṛndāvana

Unit 33 of 62Madhya-lila 16.1Madhya-lila 16.290280 source entries

Madhya-lila 16.1

Source

গৌড়োদ্যানং গৌরমেঘঃ সিঞ্চন্ স্বালোকনামৃতৈঃ । ভবাগ্নিদগ্ধজনতা-বীরুধঃ সমজীবয়ৎ ॥ ১ ॥

gauḍodyānaṁ gaura-meghaḥ siñcan svālokanāmṛtaiḥ bhavāgni-dagdha-janatā- vīrudhaḥ samajīvayat

English translation

Translation

By the nectar of His personal glance, the cloud known as Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu poured water upon the garden of Gauḍa-deśa and revived the people, who were like creepers and plants burning in the forest fire of material existence.

Word meanings

gauḍa - udyānam — upon the garden known as Gauḍa-deśa ; gaura - meghaḥ — the cloud known as Gaura ; siñcan — pouring water ; sva — His own ; ālokana - amṛtaiḥ — with the nectar of the glance ; bhava - agni — by the blazing fire of material existence ; dagdha — having been burnt ; janatā — the people in general ; vīrudhaḥ — who are like creepers and plants ; samajīvayat — revived .

Madhya-lila 16.2

Source

জয় জয় গৌরচন্দ্র জয় নিত্যানন্দ । জয়াদ্বৈতচন্দ্র জয় গৌরভক্তবৃন্দ ॥ ২ ॥

jaya jaya gauracandra jaya nityānanda jayādvaita-candra jaya gaura-bhakta-vṛnda

English translation

Translation

All glories to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu! All glories to Lord Nityānanda! All glories to Advaitacandra! And all glories to all the devotees of the Lord!

Word meanings

jaya jaya — all glories ; gauracandra — to Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; jaya — all glories ; nityānanda — to Nityānanda Prabhu ; jaya — all glories ; advaita - candra — to Advaita Ācārya ; jaya — all glories ; gaura - bhakta - vṛnda — to the devotees of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Madhya-lila 16.3

Source

প্রভুর হইল ইচ্ছা যাইতে বৃন্দাবন । শুনিয়া প্রতাপরুদ্র হইলা বিমন ॥ ৩ ॥

prabhura ha-ila icchā yāite vṛndāvana śuniyā pratāparudra ha-ilā vimana

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu decided to go to Vṛndāvana, and Mahārāja Pratāparudra became very morose upon hearing this news.

Word meanings

prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ha - ila — there was ; icchā — the desire ; yāite — to go ; vṛndāvana — to Vṛndāvana ; śuniyā — hearing ; pratāparudra — Mahārāja Pratāparudra ; ha - ilā vimana — became morose .

Madhya-lila 16.4

Source

সার্বভৌম, রামানন্দ, আনি’ দুই জন । দুঁহাকে কহেন রাজা বিনয়-বচন ॥ ৪ ॥

sārvabhauma, rāmānanda, āni’ dui jana duṅhāke kahena rājā vinaya-vacana

English translation

Translation

The King therefore called for Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and Rāmānanda Rāya, and he spoke the following submissive words to them.

Word meanings

sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma ; rāmānanda — Rāmānanda ; āni’ — calling ; dui jana — two persons ; duṅhāke — unto both of them ; kahena — said ; rājā — the King ; vinaya - vacana — submissive words .

Madhya-lila 16.5

Source

নীলাদ্রি ছাড়ি’ প্ৰভুর মন অন্যত্র যাইতে । তোমরা করহ যত্ন তাঁহারে রাখিতে ॥ ৫ ॥

nīlādri chāḍi’ prabhura mana anyatra yāite tomarā karaha yatna tāṅhāre rākhite

English translation

Translation

Pratāparudra Mahārāja said, “Please endeavor to keep Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu here at Jagannātha Purī, for now He is thinking of going elsewhere.

Word meanings

nīlādri — Jagannātha Purī ; chāḍi’ — giving up ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mana — the mind ; anyatra — elsewhere ; yāite — to go ; tomarā — both of you ; karaha — make ; yatna — endeavor ; tāṅhāre — Him ; rākhite — to keep .

Madhya-lila 16.6

Source

তাঁহা বিনা এই রাজ্য মোরে নাহি ভায় । গোসাঞি রাখিতে করহ নানা উপায় ॥ ৬ ॥

tāṅhā vinā ei rājya more nāhi bhāya gosāñi rākhite karaha nānā upāya

English translation

Translation

“Without Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, this kingdom is not pleasing to me. Therefore please try to devise some plan to enable the Lord to stay here.”

Word meanings

tāṅhā vinā — without Him ; ei rājya — this kingdom ; more — to me ; nāhi bhāya — is not very pleasing ; gosāñi — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; rākhite — to keep ; karaha — do ; nānā upāya — various sorts of devices .

Madhya-lila 16.7

Source

রামানন্দ, সার্বভৌম, দুইজনা-স্থানে । তবে যুক্তি করে প্রভু — ‘যাব বৃন্দাবনে’ ॥ ৭ ॥

rāmānanda, sārvabhauma, dui-janā-sthāne tabe yukti kare prabhu — ‘yāba vṛndāvane’

English translation

Translation

After this, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu Himself consulted Rāmānanda Rāya and Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, saying, “I shall go to Vṛndāvana.”

Word meanings

rāmānanda — Rāmānanda ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma ; dui - janā - sthāne — before the two persons ; tabe — then ; yukti kare — consulted ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yāba vṛndāvane — I shall go to Vṛndāvana .

Madhya-lila 16.8

Source

দুঁহে কহে, — রথযাত্রা কর দরশন । কার্তিক আইলে, তবে করিহ গমন ॥ ৮ ॥

duṅhe kahe, — ratha-yātrā kara daraśana kārtika āile, tabe kariha gamana

English translation

Translation

Rāmānanda Rāya and Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya requested the Lord to first observe the Ratha-yātrā festival. Then when the month of Kārttika arrived, He could go to Vṛndāvana.

Word meanings

duṅhe kahe — both of them said ; ratha - yātrā — the Ratha-yātrā festival ; kara daraśana — please see ; kārtika āile — when the month of Kārttika arrives ; tabe — at that time ; kariha gamana — You can go .

Madhya-lila 16.9

Source

কার্তিক আইলে কহে — এবে মহাশীত । দোলযাত্রা দেখি’ যাও — এই ভাল রীত ॥ ৯ ॥

kārtika āile kahe — ebe mahā-śīta dola-yātrā dekhi’ yāo — ei bhāla rīta

English translation

Translation

However, when the month of Kārttika came, they both told the Lord, “Now it is very cold. It is better that You wait to see the Dola-yātrā festival and then go. That will be very nice.”

Word meanings

kārtika āile — when the month of Kārttika arrived ; kahe — both of them said ; ebe — now ; mahā - śīta — very cold ; dola - yātrā dekhi’ — after seeing the Dola-yātrā ceremony ; yāo — You go ; ei — this ; bhāla rīta — a very nice program .

Madhya-lila 16.10

Source

আজি-কালি করি’ উঠায় বিবিধ উপায় । যাইতে সম্মতি না দেয় বিচ্ছেদের ভয় ॥ ১০ ॥

āji-kāli kari’ uṭhāya vividha upāya yāite sammati nā deya vicchedera bhaya

English translation

Translation

In this way they both presented many impediments, indirectly not granting the Lord permission to go to Vṛndāvana. They did this because they were afraid of separation from Him.

Word meanings

āji - kāli kari’ — delaying today and tomorrow ; uṭhāya — they put forward ; vividha upāya — many devices ; yāite — to go ; sammati — permission ; nā deya — did not give ; vicchedera bhaya — because of fearing separation .

Madhya-lila 16.11

Source

যদ্যপি স্বতন্ত্র প্রভু নহে নিবারণ । ভক্ত-ইচ্ছা বিনা প্রভু না করে গমন ॥ ১১ ॥

yadyapi svatantra prabhu nahe nivāraṇa bhakta-icchā vinā prabhu nā kare gamana

English translation

Translation

Although the Lord is completely independent and no one can check Him, He still did not go without the permission of His devotees.

Word meanings

yadyapi — although ; svatantra — fully independent ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nahe nivāraṇa — there is no checking Him ; bhakta - icchā vinā — without the permission of devotees ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nā kare gamana — does not go .

Madhya-lila 16.12

Source

তৃতীয় বত্সরে সব গৌড়ের ভক্তগণ । নীলাচলে চলিতে সবার হৈল মন ॥ ১২ ॥

tṛtīya vatsare saba gauḍera bhakta-gaṇa nīlācale calite sabāra haila mana

English translation

Translation

Then, for the third year, all the devotees of Bengal wanted to return again to Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

tṛtīya vatsare — in the third year ; saba — all ; gauḍera bhakta - gaṇa — devotees from Bengal ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; calite — to go ; sabāra — of everyone ; haila — there was ; mana — the mind .

Madhya-lila 16.13

Source

সবে মেলি’ গেলা অদ্বৈত আচার্যের পাশে । প্রভু দেখিতে আচার্য চলিলা উল্লাসে ॥ ১৩ ॥

sabe meli’ gelā advaita ācāryera pāśe prabhu dekhite ācārya calilā ullāse

English translation

Translation

All the Bengali devotees gathered around Advaita Ācārya, and in great jubilation the Ācārya departed for Jagannātha Purī to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

sabe — everyone ; meli’ — after assembling together ; gelā — went ; advaita — Advaita ; ācāryera — of the leader of Navadvīpa ; pāśe — in the presence ; prabhu dekhite — to see Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ācārya — Advaita Ācārya ; calilā — departed ; ullāse — in great jubilation .

Madhya-lila 16.14-15

Source

যদ্যপি প্ৰভুর আজ্ঞা গৌড়েতে রহিতে । নিত্যানন্দ-প্রভুকে প্রেমভক্তি প্রকাশিতে ॥ ১৪ ॥ তথাপি চলিলা মহাপ্ৰভুরে দেখিতে । নিত্যানন্দের প্রেম-চেষ্টা কে পারে বুঝিতে ॥ ১৫ ॥

yadyapi prabhura ājñā gauḍete rahite nityānanda-prabhuke prema-bhakti prakāśite tathāpi calilā mahāprabhure dekhite nityānandera prema-ceṣṭā ke pāre bujhite

English translation

Translation

Although the Lord told Nityānanda Prabhu to stay in Bengal and spread ecstatic love of God, Nityānanda left to go see Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Who can understand Nityānanda Prabhu’s ecstatic love?

Word meanings

yadyapi — although ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ājñā — the order ; gauḍete rahite — to stay in Bengal ; nityānanda - prabhuke — unto Nityānanda Prabhu ; prema - bhakti — ecstatic love of Godhead ; prakāśite — to preach ; tathāpi — still ; calilā — departed ; mahāprabhure — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; dekhite — to see ; nityānandera — of Lord Nityānanda Prabhu ; prema - ceṣṭā — the activities of ecstatic love ; ke — who ; pāre — is able ; bujhite — to understand .

Madhya-lila 16.16-17

Source

আচার্যরত্ন, বিদ্যানিধি, শ্রীবাস, রামাই । বাসুদেব, মুরারি, গোবিন্দাদি তিন ভাই ॥ ১৬ ॥ রাঘব পণ্ডিত নিজ-ঝালি সাজাঞা । কুলীন-গ্ৰামবাসী চলে পট্টডোরী লঞা ॥ ১৭ ॥

ācāryaratna, vidyānidhi, śrīvāsa, rāmāi vāsudeva, murāri, govindādi tina bhāi rāghava paṇḍita nija-jhāli sājāñā kulīna-grāma-vāsī cale paṭṭa-ḍorī lañā

English translation

Translation

All the devotees of Navadvīpa departed, including Ācāryaratna, Vidyānidhi, Śrīvāsa, Rāmāi, Vāsudeva, Murāri, Govinda and his two brothers and Rāghava Paṇḍita, who took bags of assorted foods. The inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma, carrying silken ropes, also departed.

Word meanings

ācāryaratna — Ācāryaratna ; vidyānidhi — Vidyānidhi ; śrīvāsa — Śrīvāsa ; rāmāi — Rāmāi ; vāsudeva — Vāsudeva ; murāri — Murāri ; govinda - ādi tina bhāi — Govinda and his two brothers ; rāghava paṇḍita — Rāghava Paṇḍita ; nija - jhāli — his own bags ; sājāñā — assorting ; kulīna - grāma - vāsī — the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma ; cale — went ; paṭṭa - ḍorī lañā — taking silken ropes .

Madhya-lila 16.18

Source

খণ্ডবাসী নরহরি, শ্রীরঘুনন্দন । সর্ব-ভক্ত চলে, তার কে করে গণন ॥ ১৮ ॥

khaṇḍa-vāsī narahari, śrī-raghunandana sarva-bhakta cale, tāra ke kare gaṇana

English translation

Translation

Narahari and Śrī Raghunandana, who were from the village of Khaṇḍa, and many other devotees also departed. Who can count them?

Word meanings

khaṇḍa - vāsī narahari — Narahari, a resident of the village Khaṇḍa ; śrī - raghunandana — Śrī Raghunandana ; sarva - bhakta — all the devotees ; cale — went ; tāra — of that ; ke — who ; kare gaṇana — can count .

Madhya-lila 16.19

Source

শিবানন্দ-সেন করে ঘাটি সমাধান । সবারে পালন করি’ সুখে লঞা যান ॥ ১৯ ॥

śivānanda-sena kare ghāṭi samādhāna sabāre pālana kari’ sukhe lañā yāna

English translation

Translation

Śivānanda Sena, who was in charge of the party, made arrangements to clear the tax collecting centers. He took care of all the devotees and happily traveled with them.

Word meanings

śivānanda - sena — Śivānanda Sena ; kare — made ; ghāṭi samādhāna — arrangements for expenditures to clear the tax collecting centers ; sabāre — everyone ; pālana — maintaining ; kari’ — doing ; sukhe — in happiness ; lañā — taking ; yāna — goes .

Madhya-lila 16.20

Source

সবার সর্বকার্য করেন, দেন বাসা-স্থান । শিবানন্দ জানে উড়িয়া-পথের সন্ধান ॥ ২০ ॥

sabāra sarva-kārya karena, dena vāsā-sthāna śivānanda jāne uḍiyā-pathera sandhāna

English translation

Translation

Śivānanda Sena took care of all the necessities the devotees required. In particular, he made arrangements for residential quarters, and he knew the roads of Orissa.

Word meanings

sabāra — of all of them ; sarva - kārya — everything necessary to be done ; karena — he does ; dena — gives ; vāsā - sthāna — residential places ; śivānanda — Śivānanda ; jāne — knows ; uḍiyā - pathera — of the roads in Orissa ; sandhāna — the junctions .

Madhya-lila 16.21

Source

সে বৎসর প্রভু দেখিতে সব ঠাকুরাণী । চলিলা আচার্য-সঙ্গে অচ্যুত-জননী ॥ ২১ ॥

se vatsara prabhu dekhite saba ṭhākurāṇī calilā ācārya-saṅge acyuta-jananī

English translation

Translation

That year all the devotees’ wives [ṭhākurāṇīs] also went to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Sītādevī, the mother of Acyutānanda, went with Advaita Ācārya.

Word meanings

se vatsara — that year ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; dekhite — to see ; saba ṭhākurāṇī — all the wives of the devotees ; calilā — went ; ācārya - saṅge — with Advaita Ācārya ; acyuta - jananī — the mother of Acyutānanda .

Madhya-lila 16.22

Source

শ্রীবাস পণ্ডিত-সঙ্গে চলিলা মালিনী । শিবানন্দ-সঙ্গে চলে তাঁহার গৃহিণী ॥ ২২ ॥

śrīvāsa paṇḍita-saṅge calilā mālinī śivānanda-saṅge cale tāṅhāra gṛhiṇī

English translation

Translation

Śrīvāsa Paṇḍita also took his wife, Mālinī, and the wife of Śivānanda Sena also went with her husband.

Word meanings

śrīvāsa paṇḍita - saṅge — with Śrīvāsa Paṇḍita ; calilā — went ; mālinī — his wife, Mālinī ; śivānanda - saṅge — with Śivānanda Sena ; cale — goes ; tāṅhāra — his ; gṛhiṇī — wife .

Madhya-lila 16.23

Source

শিবানন্দের বালক, নাম — চৈতন্য-দাস । তেঁহো চলিয়াছে প্রভুরে দেখিতে উল্লাস ॥ ২৩ ॥

śivānandera bālaka, nāma — caitanya-dāsa teṅho caliyāche prabhure dekhite ullāsa

English translation

Translation

Caitanya dāsa, the son of Śivānanda Sena, also jubilantly accompanied them as they went to see the Lord.

Word meanings

śivānandera bālaka — the son of Śivānanda ; nāma — named ; caitanya - dāsa — Caitanya dāsa ; teṅho — he ; caliyāche — was going ; prabhure — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; dekhite — to see ; ullāsa — jubilantly .

Madhya-lila 16.24

Source

আচার্যরত্ন-সঙ্গে চলে তাঁহার গৃহিণী । তাঁহার প্রেমের কথা কহিতে না জানি ॥ ২৪ ॥

ācāryaratna-saṅge cale tāṅhāra gṛhiṇī tāṅhāra premera kathā kahite nā jāni

English translation

Translation

The wife of Candraśekhara [Ācāryaratna] also went. I cannot describe the greatness of Candraśekhara’s love for the Lord.

Word meanings

ācāryaratna - saṅge — with Candraśekhara ; cale — goes ; tāṅhāra — his ; gṛhiṇī — wife ; tāṅhāra — his ; premera kathā — the description of the ecstatic love ; kahite — to speak ; nā jāni — I do not know how .

Madhya-lila 16.25

Source

সব ঠাকুরাণী মহাপ্রভুকে ভিক্ষা দিতে । প্রভুর নানা প্রিয় দ্রব্য নিল ঘর হৈতে ॥ ২৫ ॥

saba ṭhākurāṇī mahāprabhuke bhikṣā dite prabhura nānā priya dravya nila ghara haite

English translation

Translation

To offer Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu various types of food, all the wives of the great devotees brought from home various dishes that pleased Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

saba ṭhākurāṇī — all the wives of the great devotees ; mahāprabhuke — to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bhikṣā dite — to offer food ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nānā — various ; priya dravya — pleasing foods ; nila — took ; ghara haite — from home .

Madhya-lila 16.26

Source

শিবানন্দ-সেন করে সব সমাধান । ঘাটিয়াল প্রবোধি’ দেন সবারে বাসা-স্থান ॥ ২৬ ॥

śivānanda-sena kare saba samādhāna ghāṭiyāla prabodhi’ dena sabāre vāsā-sthāna

English translation

Translation

As stated, Śivānanda Sena made all arrangements for the party’s necessities. In particular, he pacified the men in charge of levying taxes and found resting places for everyone.

Word meanings

śivānanda - sena — Śivānanda Sena ; kare — does ; saba samādhāna — all arrangements ; ghāṭiyāla — the men in charge of levying taxes ; prabodhi’ — satisfying ; dena — gives ; sabāre — to everyone ; vāsā - sthāna — resting places .

Madhya-lila 16.27

Source

ভক্ষ্য দিয়া করেন সবার সর্বত্র পালনে । পরম আনন্দে যান প্রভুর দরশনে ॥ ২৭ ॥

bhakṣya diyā karena sabāra sarvatra pālane parama ānande yāna prabhura daraśane

English translation

Translation

Śivānanda Sena also supplied food to all the devotees and took care of them along the way. In this way, feeling great happiness, he went to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu at Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

bhakṣya diyā — supplying food ; karena — he does ; sabāra — of everyone ; sarvatra — everywhere ; pālane — maintenance ; parama ānande — in great pleasure ; yāna — he goes ; prabhura daraśane — to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Madhya-lila 16.28

Source

রেমুণায় আসিয়া কৈল গোপীনাথ দরশন । আচার্য করিল তাহাঁ কীর্তন, নর্তন ॥ ২৮ ॥

remuṇāya āsiyā kaila gopīnātha daraśana ācārya karila tāhāṅ kīrtana, nartana

English translation

Translation

When they all arrived at Remuṇā, they went to see Lord Gopīnātha. In the temple there, Advaita Ācārya danced and chanted.

Word meanings

remuṇāya — to Remuṇā ; āsiyā — after coming ; kaila — performed ; gopīnātha daraśana — visiting the temple of Gopīnātha ; ācārya — Advaita Ācārya ; karila — performed ; tāhāṅ — there ; kīrtana — chanting ; nartana — dancing .

Madhya-lila 16.29

Source

নিত্যানন্দের পরিচয় সব সেবক সনে । বহুত সম্মান আসি’ কৈল সেবকগণে ॥ ২৯ ॥

nityānandera paricaya saba sevaka sane bahuta sammāna āsi’ kaila sevaka-gaṇe

English translation

Translation

All the priests of the temple had been previously acquainted with Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu; therefore they all came to offer great respects to the Lord.

Word meanings

nityānandera — of Lord Nityānanda Prabhu ; paricaya — there was acquaintance ; saba — all ; sevaka sane — with the priests of the temple ; bahuta sammāna — great respect ; āsi’ — coming ; kaila — offered ; sevaka - gaṇe — all the priests .

Madhya-lila 16.30

Source

সেই রাত্রি সব মহান্ত তাহাঞি রহিলা । বার ক্ষীর আনি’ আগে সেবক ধরিলা ॥ ৩০ ॥

sei rātri saba mahānta tāhāñi rahilā bāra kṣīra āni’ āge sevaka dharilā

English translation

Translation

That night, all the great devotees remained in the temple, and the priests brought twelve pots of condensed milk, which they placed before Lord Nityānanda Prabhu.

Word meanings

sei rātri — that night ; saba mahānta — all the great devotees ; tāhāñi rahilā — remained there ; bāra — twelve pots ; kṣīra — condensed milk ; āni’ — bringing ; āge — in front of Nityānanda Prabhu ; sevaka — the priests ; dharilā — placed .

Madhya-lila 16.31

Source

ক্ষীর বাঁটি’ সবারে দিল প্রভু-নিত্যানন্দ । ক্ষীর-প্রসাদ পাঞা সবার বাড়িল আনন্দ ॥ ৩১ ॥

kṣīra bāṅṭi’ sabāre dila prabhu-nityānanda kṣīra-prasāda pāñā sabāra bāḍila ānanda

English translation

Translation

When the condensed milk was placed before Nityānanda Prabhu, He distributed the prasādam to everyone, and thus everyone’s transcendental bliss increased.

Word meanings

kṣīra — the condensed milk ; bāṅṭi’ — dividing ; sabāre — unto everyone ; dila — gave ; prabhu - nityānanda — Nityānanda Prabhu ; kṣīra - prasāda — remnants of condensed milk from the Deity ; pāñā — getting ; sabāra — of everyone ; bāḍila — increased ; ānanda — the transcendental bliss .

Madhya-lila 16.32

Source

মাধবপুরীর কথা, গোপাল-স্থাপন । তাঁহারে গোপাল যৈছে মাগিল চন্দন ॥ ৩২ ॥

mādhava-purīra kathā, gopāla-sthāpana tāṅhāre gopāla yaiche māgila candana

English translation

Translation

They then all discussed the story of Śrī Mādhavendra Purī’s installation of the Gopāla Deity, and they discussed how Gopāla begged sandalwood from him.

Word meanings

mādhava - purīra kathā — the narration of Mādhavendra Purī ; gopāla - sthāpana — installation of the Deity of Gopāla ; tāṅhāre — unto him ; gopāla — Lord Gopāla ; yaiche — just as ; māgila — He begged ; candana — sandalwood .

Madhya-lila 16.33

Source

তাঁর লাগি’ গোপীনাথ ক্ষীর চুরি কৈল । মহাপ্ৰভুর মুখে আগে এ কথা শুনিল ॥ ৩৩ ॥

tāṅra lāgi’ gopīnātha kṣīra curi kaila mahāprabhura mukhe āge e kathā śunila

English translation

Translation

It was Gopīnātha who stole condensed milk for the sake of Mādhavendra Purī. This incident had been previously related by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu Himself.

Word meanings

tāṅra lāgi’ — for him (Mādhavendra Purī) ; gopīnātha — the Deity named Gopīnātha ; kṣīra — condensed milk ; curi — stealing ; kaila — performed ; mahāprabhura mukhe — from the mouth of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āge — previously ; e kathā — this incident ; śunila — heard .

Madhya-lila 16.34

Source

সেই কথা সবার মধ্যে কহে নিত্যানন্দ । শুনিয়া বৈষ্ণব-মনে বাড়িল আনন্দ ॥ ৩৪ ॥

sei kathā sabāra madhye kahe nityānanda śuniyā vaiṣṇava-mane bāḍila ānanda

English translation

Translation

This same narration was again related by Lord Nityānanda to all the devotees, and their transcendental bliss increased as they heard the story again.

Word meanings

sei kathā — that incident ; sabāra madhye — among all of them ; kahe — relates ; nityānanda — Lord Nityānanda Prabhu ; śuniyā — hearing ; vaiṣṇava - mane — in the minds of all the Vaiṣṇavas ; bāḍila — increased ; ānanda — the transcendental bliss .

Purport

The words mahāprabhura mukhe, “from the mouth of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu,” are significant because Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu first heard the story of Mādhavendra Purī from His spiritual master, Śrīpāda Īśvara Purī. (See Madhya-līlā, chapter four, verse 18.) After staying at Śrī Advaita’s house in Śāntipura for some time, the Lord narrated the story of Mādhavendra Purī to Nityānanda Prabhu, Jagadānanda Prabhu, Dāmodara Paṇḍita and Mukunda dāsa. When they went to Remuṇā, to the temple of Gopīnātha, He described Mādhavendra Purī’s installation of the Gopāla Deity as well as Gopīnātha’s stealing condensed milk. Due to this incident, Lord Gopīnātha became well known as Kṣīracorā, the thief who stole condensed milk.

Madhya-lila 16.35

Source

এইমত চলি’ চলি’ কটক আইলা । সাক্ষিগোপাল দেখি’ সবে সে দিন রহিলা ॥ ৩৫ ॥

ei-mata cali’ cali’ kaṭaka āilā sākṣi-gopāla dekhi’ sabe se dina rahilā

English translation

Translation

Walking and walking in this way, the devotees arrived at the city of Kaṭaka, where they remained for a day and saw the temple of Sākṣi-gopāla.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; cali’ cali’ — walking and walking ; kaṭaka āilā — they reached the town known as Kaṭaka ; sākṣi - gopāla dekhi’ — after seeing the Deity known as Sākṣi-gopāla ; sabe — all the devotees ; se dina — that day ; rahilā — stayed .

Madhya-lila 16.36

Source

সাক্ষিগোপালের কথা কহে নিত্যানন্দ । শুনিয়া বৈষ্ণব-মনে বাড়িল আনন্দ ॥ ৩৬ ॥

sākṣi-gopālera kathā kahe nityānanda śuniyā vaiṣṇava-mane bāḍila ānanda

English translation

Translation

When Nityānanda Prabhu described all the activities of Sākṣi-gopāla, transcendental bliss increased in the minds of all the Vaiṣṇavas.

Word meanings

sākṣi - gopālera — of the Deity known as Sākṣi-gopāla ; kathā — the narration ; kahe — describes ; nityānanda — Nityānanda Prabhu ; śuniyā — hearing ; vaiṣṇava - mane — in the minds of all the Vaiṣṇavas ; bāḍila — increased ; ānanda — the transcendental bliss .

Purport

For these activities refer to Madhya-līlā, chapter five, verses 8-138.

Madhya-lila 16.37

Source

প্ৰভুকে মিলিতে সবার উৎকণ্ঠা অন্তরে । শীঘ্র করি’ আইলা সবে শ্রীনীলাচলে ॥ ৩৭ ॥

prabhuke milite sabāra utkaṇṭhā antare śīghra kari’ āilā sabe śrī-nīlācale

English translation

Translation

Everyone in the party was very anxious at heart to see Caitanya Mahāprabhu; therefore they hastily went on to Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

prabhuke milite — to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sabāra — of everyone ; utkaṇṭhā — anxiety ; antare — within the heart ; śīghra kari’ — making great haste ; āilā — reached ; sabe — all of them ; śrī - nīlācale — Jagannātha Purī .

Madhya-lila 16.38

Source

আঠারনালাকে আইলা গোসাঞি শুনিয়া । দুইমালা পাঠাইলা গোবিন্দ-হাতে দিয়া ॥ ৩৮ ॥

āṭhāranālāke āilā gosāñi śuniyā dui-mālā pāṭhāilā govinda-hāte diyā

English translation

Translation

When they all arrived at a bridge called Āṭhāranālā, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, hearing the news of their arrival, sent two garlands with Govinda.

Word meanings

āṭhāranālāke — Āṭhāranālā ; āilā — they have reached ; gosāñi — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śuniyā — hearing ; dui - mālā — two garlands ; pāṭhāilā — sent ; govinda - hāte diyā — through the hands of Govinda .

Madhya-lila 16.39

Source

দুই মালা গোবিন্দ দুইজনে পরাইল । অদ্বৈত, অবধূত-গোসাঞি বড় সুখ পাইল ॥ ৩৯ ॥

dui mālā govinda dui-jane parāila advaita, avadhūta-gosāñi baḍa sukha pāila

English translation

Translation

Govinda offered the two garlands to Advaita Ācārya and Nityānanda Prabhu, and They both became very happy.

Word meanings

dui mālā — the two garlands ; govinda — Govinda ; dui - jane parāila — placed on the necks of two personalities ; advaita — Advaita Ācārya ; avadhūta - gosāñi — Nityānanda Prabhu ; baḍa sukha pāila — became very happy .

Madhya-lila 16.40

Source

তাহাঞি আরম্ভ কৈল কৃষ্ণ-সংকীর্তন । নাচিতে নাচিতে চলি’ আইলা দুইজন ॥ ৪০ ॥

tāhāñi ārambha kaila kṛṣṇa-saṅkīrtana nācite nācite cali’ āilā dui-jana

English translation

Translation

Indeed, They began chanting the holy name of Kṛṣṇa on that very spot, and in this way, dancing and dancing, Advaita Ācārya and Nityānanda Prabhu reached Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

tāhāñi — on that very spot ; ārambha kaila — began ; kṛṣṇa - saṅkīrtana — chanting the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; nācite nācite — dancing and dancing ; cali’ — going ; āilā — reached ; dui - jana — both of Them .

Madhya-lila 16.41

Source

পুনঃ মালা দিয়া স্বরূপাদি নিজগণ । আগু বাড়ি’ পাঠাইল শচীর নন্দন ॥ ৪১ ॥

punaḥ mālā diyā svarūpādi nija-gaṇa āgu bāḍi’ pāṭhāila śacīra nandana

English translation

Translation

Then, for the second time, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu sent garlands through Svarūpa Dāmodara and other personal associates. Thus they went forward, sent by the son of mother Śacī.

Word meanings

punaḥ — again ; mālā — garlands ; diyā — offering ; svarūpa - ādi — Svarūpa Dāmodara Gosvāmī and others ; nija - gaṇa — personal associates ; āgu bāḍi’ — going forward ; pāṭhāila — sent ; śacīra nandana — the son of mother Śacī .

Madhya-lila 16.42

Source

নরেন্দ্র আসিয়া তাহাঁ সবারে মিলিলা । মহাপ্ৰভুর দত্ত মালা সবারে পরাইলা ॥ ৪২ ॥

narendra āsiyā tāhāṅ sabāre mililā mahāprabhura datta mālā sabāre parāilā

English translation

Translation

When the devotees from Bengal reached Lake Narendra, Svarūpa Dāmodara and the others met them and offered them the garlands given by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

narendra — to the lake named Narendra ; āsiyā — coming ; tāhāṅ — there ; sabāre — everyone ; mililā — met ; mahāprabhura — by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; datta — given ; mālā — garlands ; sabāre parāilā — offered to everyone .

Madhya-lila 16.43

Source

সিংহদ্বার-নিকটে আইলা শুনি’ গৌররায় । আপনে আসিয়া প্রভু মিলিলা সবায় ॥ ৪৩ ॥

siṁha-dvāra-nikaṭe āilā śuni’ gaurarāya āpane āsiyā prabhu mililā sabāya

English translation

Translation

When the devotees finally reached the lion gate, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu heard the news and personally went to meet them.

Word meanings

siṁha - dvāra — the lion gate ; nikaṭe — near ; āilā — arrived ; śuni’ — hearing ; gaurarāya — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āpane — personally ; āsiyā — coming ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mililā sabāya — met them all .

Madhya-lila 16.44

Source

সবা লঞা কৈল জগন্নাথ-দরশন । সবা লঞা আইলা পুনঃ আপন-ভবন ॥ ৪৪ ॥

sabā lañā kaila jagannātha-daraśana sabā lañā āilā punaḥ āpana-bhavana

English translation

Translation

Then Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and all His devotees visited Lord Jagannātha. Finally, accompanied by them all, He returned to His own residence.

Word meanings

sabā lañā — taking all of them ; kaila — performed ; jagannātha - daraśana — seeing Lord Jagannātha ; sabā lañā — taking them all ; āilā — went back ; punaḥ — again ; āpana - bhavana — to His own residence .

Madhya-lila 16.45

Source

বাণীনাথ, কাশীমিশ্র প্রসাদ আনিল । স্বহস্তে সবারে প্রভু প্রসাদ খাওয়াইল ॥ ৪৫ ॥

vāṇīnātha, kāśī-miśra prasāda ānila svahaste sabāre prabhu prasāda khāoyāila

English translation

Translation

Vāṇīnātha Rāya and Kāśī Miśra then brought a large quantity of prasādam, and Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu distributed it with His own hand and fed them all.

Word meanings

vāṇīnātha — Vāṇīnātha ; kāśī - miśra — Kāśī Miśra ; prasāda ānila — brought all kinds of prasādam ; sva - haste — with His own hand ; sabāre — unto everyone ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; prasāda — the remnants of the food of Jagannātha ; khāoyāila — fed .

Madhya-lila 16.46

Source

পূর্ব বৎসরে যাঁর যেই বাসা-স্থান । তাহাঁ সবা পাঠাঞা করাইল বিশ্রাম ॥ ৪৬ ॥

pūrva vatsare yāṅra yei vāsā-sthāna tāhāṅ sabā pāṭhāñā karāila viśrāma

English translation

Translation

In the previous year, everyone had his own particular residence, and the same residences were again offered. Thus they all went to take rest.

Word meanings

pūrva vatsare — in the previous year ; yāṅra — of whom ; yei — wherever ; vāsā - sthāna — place to stay ; tāhāṅ — there ; sabā — all of them ; pāṭhāñā — sending ; karāila viśrāma — made them rest .

Madhya-lila 16.47

Source

এইমত ভক্তগণ রহিলা চারি মাস । প্ৰভুর সহিত করে কীর্তন-বিলাস ॥ ৪৭ ॥

ei-mata bhakta-gaṇa rahilā cāri māsa prabhura sahita kare kīrtana-vilāsa

English translation

Translation

For four continuous months all the devotees remained there and enjoyed chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; bhakta - gaṇa — the devotees ; rahilā — remained ; cāri māsa — for four months ; prabhura sahita — with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kare — performed ; kīrtana - vilāsa — the pastimes of saṅkīrtana. .

Madhya-lila 16.48

Source

পূর্ববৎ রথযাত্রা-কাল যবে আইল । সবা লঞা গুণ্ডিচা-মন্দির প্ৰক্ষালিল ॥ ৪৮ ॥

pūrvavat ratha-yātrā-kāla yābe āila sabā lañā guṇḍicā-mandira prakṣālila

English translation

Translation

As in the previous year, they all washed the Guṇḍicā temple when the time for Ratha-yātrā arrived.

Word meanings

pūrva - vat — as in the previous year ; ratha - yātrā - kāla — the time for Ratha-yātrā festival ; yābe — when ; āila — arrived ; sabā lañā — taking all of them ; guṇḍicā - mandira — the temple of Guṇḍicā ; prakṣālila — washed .

Madhya-lila 16.49

Source

কুলীনগ্রামী পট্টডোরী জগন্নাথে দিল । পূর্ববৎ রথ-অগ্রে নর্তন করিল ॥ ৪৯ ॥

kulīna-grāmī paṭṭa-ḍorī jagannāthe dila pūrvavat ratha-agre nartana karila

English translation

Translation

The inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma delivered silken ropes to Lord Jagannātha, and, as previously, they all danced before the Lord’s car.

Word meanings

kulīna - grāmī — the residents of Kulīna-grāma ; paṭṭa - ḍorī — silken ropes ; jagannāthe dila — offered to Lord Jagannātha ; pūrva - vat — as in the previous year ; ratha - agre — in front of the car ; nartana karila — danced .

Madhya-lila 16.50

Source

বহু নৃত্য করি’ পুনঃ চলিল উদ্যানে । বাপী-তীরে তাহাঁ যাই’ করিল বিশ্রামে ॥ ৫০ ॥

bahu nṛtya kari’ punaḥ calila udyāne vāpī-tīre tāhāṅ yāi’ karila viśrāme

English translation

Translation

After dancing a great deal, they all went to a nearby garden and took rest beside a lake.

Word meanings

bahu nṛtya kari’ — after dancing a great deal ; punaḥ — again ; calila — started for ; udyāne — the garden ; vāpī - tīre — on the bank of the lake ; tāhāṅ yāi’ — going there ; karila viśrāme — took rest .

Madhya-lila 16.51

Source

রাঢ়ী এক বিপ্র, তেঁহো — নিত্যানন্দ দাস । মহা-ভাগ্যবান্ তেঁহো, নাম — কৃষ্ণদাস ॥ ৫১ ॥

rāḍhī eka vipra, teṅho — nityānanda dāsa mahā-bhāgyavān teṅho, nāma — kṛṣṇadāsa

English translation

Translation

A brāhmaṇa named Kṛṣṇadāsa, who was a resident of Rāḍha-deśa and a servant of Lord Nityānanda’s, was a very fortunate person.

Word meanings

rāḍhī eka vipra — a brāhmaṇa resident of Rāḍha-deśa (where the Ganges does not flow) ; teṅho — he ; nityānanda dāsa — servant of Lord Nityānanda ; mahā - bhāgyavān — greatly fortunate ; teṅho — he ; nāma — named ; kṛṣṇadāsa — Kṛṣṇadāsa .

Madhya-lila 16.52

Source

ঘট ভরি’ প্রভুর তেঁহো অভিষেক কৈল । তাঁর অভিষেকে প্রভু মহা-তৃপ্ত হৈল ॥ ৫২ ॥

ghaṭa bhari’ prabhura teṅho abhiṣeka kaila tāṅra abhiṣeke prabhu mahā-tṛpta haila

English translation

Translation

It was Kṛṣṇadāsa who filled a great waterpot and poured it over the Lord while He was taking His bath. The Lord was greatly satisfied by this.

Word meanings

ghaṭa bhari’ — filling a waterpot ; prabhura — of Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; teṅho — he ; abhiṣeka kaila — performed the bathing ; tāṅra — his ; abhiṣeke — by the act of bathing the Lord ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mahā - tṛpta haila — became very satisfied .

Madhya-lila 16.53

Source

বলগণ্ডি-ভোগের বহু প্রসাদ আইল । সবা সঙ্গে মহাপ্ৰভু প্রসাদ খাইল ॥ ৫৩ ॥

balagaṇḍi-bhogera bahu prasāda āila sabā saṅge mahāprabhu prasāda khāila

English translation

Translation

The remnants of food offered to the Lord at Balagaṇḍi then arrived in great quantity, and Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and all His devotees ate it.

Word meanings

balagaṇḍi - bhogera — of the food offered at Balagaṇḍi ; bahu prasāda — a great quantity of prasādam ; āila — arrived ; sabā saṅge — with all the devotees ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; prasāda — remnants of the food of Jagannātha ; khāila — ate .

Purport

In reference to Balagaṇḍi, see Madhya-līlā 13.193.

Madhya-lila 16.54

Source

পূর্ববৎ রথযাত্রা কৈল দরশন । হেরাপঞ্চমী-যাত্রা দেখে লঞা ভক্তগণ ॥ ৫৪ ॥

pūrvavat ratha-yātrā kaila daraśana herā-pañcamī-yātrā dekhe lañā bhakta-gaṇa

English translation

Translation

As in the previous year, the Lord, with all the devotees, saw the Ratha-yātrā festival and the Herā-pañcamī festival as well.

Word meanings

pūrva - vat — as in the previous year ; ratha - yātrā — the car festival ; kaila daraśana — saw ; herā - pañcamī - yātrā — the festival of Herā-pañcamī ; dekhe — He sees ; lañā bhakta - gaṇa — with all the devotees .

Madhya-lila 16.55

Source

আচার্য-গোসাঞি প্ৰভুর কৈল নিমন্ত্রণ । তার মধ্যে কৈল যৈছে ঝড়-বরিষণ ॥ ৫৫ ॥

ācārya-gosāñi prabhura kaila nimantraṇa tāra madhye kaila yaiche jhaḍa-variṣaṇa

English translation

Translation

Advaita Ācārya then extended an invitation to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, and there was a great rainstorm connected with that incident.

Word meanings

ācārya - gosāñi — Advaita Ācārya ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kaila — made ; nimantraṇa — invitation ; tāra madhye — within that episode ; kaila — occurred ; yaiche — just as ; jhaḍa - variṣaṇa — rainstorm .

Madhya-lila 16.56

Source

বিস্তারি’ বর্ণিয়াছেন দাস-বৃন্দাবন । শ্রীবাস প্রভুরে তবে কৈল নিমন্ত্রণ ॥ ৫৬ ॥

vistāri’ varṇiyāchena dāsa-vṛndāvana śrīvāsa prabhure tabe kaila nimantraṇa

English translation

Translation

All these episodes have been elaborately described by Śrīla Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura. Then one day Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura extended an invitation to the Lord.

Word meanings

vistāri’ — elaborating ; varṇiyāchena — has described ; dāsa - vṛndāvana — Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura ; śrīvāsa — Śrīvāsa ; prabhure — to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tabe — then ; kaila nimantraṇa — gave an invitation .

Purport

The Caitanya-bhāgavata ( Antya-khaṇḍa, chapter nine) gives the following description. One day Śrīla Advaita Ācārya, having extended an invitation to Caitanya Mahāprabhu, thought that if the Lord came alone He would feed Him to His great satisfaction. It then so happened that when the other sannyāsīs were going to Advaita Ācārya’s to take lunch, there was a big rainstorm, and they could not reach His house. Thus, according to Advaita Ācārya’s desires, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu came alone and accepted the prasādam.

Madhya-lila 16.57

Source

প্রভুর প্রিয়-ব্যঞ্জন সব রান্ধেন মালিনী । ‘ভক্ত্যে দাসী’-অভিমান, ‘স্নেহেতে জননী’ ॥ ৫৭ ॥

prabhura priya-vyañjana saba rāndhena mālinī ‘bhaktye dāsī’-abhimāna, ‘snehete jananī’

English translation

Translation

The Lord’s favorite vegetables were cooked by Mālinīdevī, the wife of Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura. She devotedly considered herself a maidservant of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, but in affection she was just like a mother.

Word meanings

prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; priya - vyañjana — favorite vegetables ; saba — all ; rāndhena — cooks ; mālinī — the wife of Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura ; bhaktye dāsī — in devotion she was just like a maidservant ; abhimāna — it was her conception ; snehete — in affection ; jananī — exactly like a mother .

Madhya-lila 16.58

Source

আচার্যরত্ন-আদি যত মুখ্য ভক্তগণ । মধ্যে মধ্যে প্ৰভুরে করেন নিমন্ত্রণ ॥ ৫৮ ॥

ācāryaratna-ādi yata mukhya bhakta-gaṇa madhye madhye prabhure karena nimantraṇa

English translation

Translation

All the chief devotees, headed by Candraśekhara [Ācāryaratna], used to extend invitations to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu periodically.

Word meanings

ācāryaratna — Candraśekhara ; ādi — and others ; yata — all ; mukhya bhakta - gaṇa — chief devotees ; madhye madhye — at intervals ; prabhure — to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; karena nimantraṇa — gave invitations .

Madhya-lila 16.59

Source

চাতুর্মাস্য-অন্তে পুনঃ নিত্যানন্দে লঞা । কিবা যুক্তি করে নিত্য নিভৃতে বসিয়া ॥ ৫৯ ॥

cāturmāsya-ante punaḥ nityānande lañā kibā yukti kare nitya nibhṛte vasiyā

English translation

Translation

At the end of the four-month Cāturmāsya period, Caitanya Mahāprabhu again consulted with Nityānanda Prabhu daily in a solitary place. No one could understand what Their consultation was about.

Word meanings

cāturmāsya - ante — at the end of Cāturmāsya ; punaḥ — again ; nityānande — Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu ; lañā — taking into confidence ; kibā — what ; yukti kare — They consult ; nitya — daily ; nibhṛte — in a solitary place ; vasiyā — sitting .

Madhya-lila 16.60

Source

আচার্য-গোসাঞি প্ৰভুকে কহে ঠারে-ঠোরে । আচার্য তর্জা পড়ে, কেহ বুঝিতে না পারে ॥ ৬০ ॥

ācārya-gosāñi prabhuke kahe ṭhāre-ṭhore ācārya tarjā paḍe, keha bujhite nā pāre

English translation

Translation

Then Śrīla Advaita Ācārya said something to Caitanya Mahāprabhu through gestures and read some poetic passages, which no one understood.

Word meanings

ācārya - gosāñi — Advaita Ācārya ; prabhuke — unto Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kahe — speaks ; ṭhāre - ṭhore — by indications ; ācārya — Advaita Ācārya ; tarjā paḍe — reads some poetic passages ; keha — anyone ; bujhite — to understand ; nā pāre — was not able .

Madhya-lila 16.61

Source

তাঁর মুখ দেখি’ হাসে শচীর নন্দন । অঙ্গীকার জানি’ আচার্য করেন নর্তন ॥ ৬১ ॥

tāṅra mukha dekhi’ hāse śacīra nandana aṅgīkāra jāni’ ācārya karena nartana

English translation

Translation

Seeing the face of Advaita Ācārya, Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu smiled. Understanding that the Lord had accepted the proposal, Advaita Ācārya started to dance.

Word meanings

tāṅra mukha — His face ; dekhi’ — seeing ; hāse — smiles ; śacīra nandana — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; aṅgīkāra jāni’ — understanding the acceptance ; ācārya — Advaita Ācārya ; karena — performed ; nartana — dancing .

Madhya-lila 16.62

Source

কিবা প্রার্থনা, কিবা আজ্ঞা — কেহ না বুঝিল । আলিঙ্গন করি’ প্রভু তাঁরে বিদায় দিল ॥ ৬২ ॥

kibā prārthanā, kibā ājñā — keha nā bujhila āliṅgana kari’ prabhu tāṅre vidāya dila

English translation

Translation

No one knew what Advaita Ācārya requested or what the Lord ordered. After embracing the Ācārya, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu bade Him farewell.

Word meanings

kibā — what ; prārthanā — the request ; kibā — what ; ājnā — the order ; keha — anyone ; nā bujhila — did not know ; āliṅgana kari’ — embracing ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — to Him ; vidāya dila — bade farewell .

Madhya-lila 16.63

Source

নিত্যানন্দে কহে প্রভু, — শুনহ, শ্ৰীপাদ । এই আমি মাগি, তুমি করহ প্রসাদ ॥ ৬৩ ॥

nityānande kahe prabhu, — śunaha, śrīpāda ei āmi māgi, tumi karaha prasāda

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu then told Nityānanda Prabhu, “Please hear Me, O holy man: I now request something of You. Kindly grant My request.

Word meanings

nityānande — unto Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu ; kahe — says ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śunaha — please hear ; śrīpāda — O holy man ; ei — this ; āmi — I ; māgi — request ; tumi — You ; karaha — kindly show ; prasāda — mercy .

Madhya-lila 16.64

Source

প্ৰতিবর্ষ নীলাচলে তুমি না আসিবা । গৌড়ে রহি’ মোর ইচ্ছা সফল করিবা ॥ ৬৪ ॥

prati-varṣa nīlācale tumi nā āsibā gauḍe rahi’ mora icchā saphala karibā

English translation

Translation

“Do not come to Jagannātha Purī every year, but stay in Bengal and fulfill My desire.”

Word meanings

prati - varṣa — every year ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; tumi — You ; nā āsibā — do not come ; gauḍe rahi’ — staying in Bengal ; mora icchā — My desire ; sa - phala karibā — make successful .

Purport

The mission of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu is to spread the only medicine effective in this fallen Age of Kali — the chanting of the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra. Following the orders of His mother, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was residing at Jagannātha Purī, and the devotees were coming to see Him. However, the Lord felt that this message must be spread very elaborately in Bengal, and in His absence there was not a second person capable of doing it. Consequently the Lord requested Nityānanda Prabhu to stay there and broadcast the message of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. The Lord also entrusted a similar preaching responsibility to Rūpa Gosvāmī and Sanātana Gosvāmī. Nityānanda Prabhu was requested not to come every year to Jagannātha Purī, although seeing Lord Jagannātha greatly benefits everyone. Does this mean that the Lord was refusing Nityānanda Prabhu a fortunate opportunity? No. One who is a faithful servant of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu must execute His order, even if one has to sacrifice going to Jagannātha Purī to see Lord Jagannātha there. In other words, it is a greater fortune to carry out Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s order than to satisfy one’s senses by seeing Lord Jagannātha.

Preaching Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s cult throughout the world is more important than staying in Vṛndāvana or Jagannātha Purī for one’s own personal satisfaction. Spreading Kṛṣṇa consciousness is Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s mission; therefore His sincere devotees must carry out His desire.

pṛthivīte āche yata nagarādi grāma sarvatra pracāra haibe mora nāma

The devotees of Lord Caitanya must preach Kṛṣṇa consciousness in every village and town in the world. That will satisfy the Lord. It is not that one should act whimsically for his own personal satisfaction. This order comes down through the paramparā system, and the spiritual master presents these orders to the disciple so that he can spread the message of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. It is the duty of every disciple to carry out the order of the bona fide spiritual master and spread Lord Caitanya’s message all over the world.

Madhya-lila 16.65

Source

তাহাঁ সিদ্ধি করে — হেন অন্যে না দেখিয়ে । আমার ‘দুষ্কর’ কর্ম, তোমা হৈতে হয়ে ॥ ৬৫ ॥

tāhāṅ siddhi kare — hena anye nā dekhiye āmāra ‘duṣkara’ karma, tomā haite haye

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “You can perform a task that even I cannot do. But for You, I cannot find anyone in Gauḍa-deśa who can fulfill My mission there.”

Word meanings

tāhāṅ — there ; siddhi — success ; kare — makes ; hena — such ; anye — other person ; nā — not ; dekhiye — I see ; āmāra — My ; duṣkara — difficult to perform ; karma — work ; tomā — You ; haite — from ; haye — becomes successful .

Purport

Lord Caitanya’s mission is to deliver the fallen souls of this age. In this Age of Kali, practically cent percent of the population is fallen. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu certainly delivered many fallen souls, but His disciples mainly came from the upper classes. For example, He delivered Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī, Sanātana Gosvāmī, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and many others who were socially elevated but fallen from the spiritual point of view. Śrīla Rūpa and Sanātana Gosvāmīs were situated in government service, and Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya was the topmost scholar of India. Similarly, Prakāśānanda Sarasvatī was a leader of many thousands of Māyāvādī sannyāsīs. It was Śrīla Nityānanda Prabhu, however, who delivered persons like Jagāi and Mādhāi. Therefore, Lord Caitanya says, āmāra ‘duṣkara’ karma, tomā haite haye. Jagāi and Mādhāi were delivered solely by Nityānanda Prabhu’s mercy. When they injured Nityānanda Prabhu, Lord Caitanya became angry and decided to kill them with His Sudarśana cakra, but Nityānanda Prabhu saved them from the Lord’s wrath and delivered them. In the incarnation of Gaura-Nitāi, the Lord is not supposed to kill demons but is supposed to deliver them by preaching Kṛṣṇa consciousness. In the case of Jagāi and Mādhāi, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was so angry that He would have immediately killed them, but Nityānanda Prabhu was so kind that He not only saved them from death but elevated them to the transcendental position. Thus what was not possible for Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was carried out by Nityānanda Prabhu.

Similarly, if one is true to Gaura-Nitāi’s service in the disciplic succession, he can even excel Nityānanda Prabhu’s service. This is the process of disciplic succession. Nityānanda Prabhu delivered Jagāi and Mādhāi, but a servant of Nityānanda Prabhu, by His grace, can deliver many thousands of Jagāis and Mādhāis. That is the special benediction of the disciplic succession. One who is situated in the disciplic succession can be understood by the result of his activities. This is always true as far as the activities of the Lord and His devotees are concerned. Therefore Lord Śiva says:

ārādhanānāṁ sarveṣāṁ viṣṇor ārādhanaṁ param tasmāt parataraṁ devi tadīyānāṁ samarcanam

“Of all types of worship, worship of Lord Viṣṇu is best, and better than the worship of Lord Viṣṇu is the worship of His devotee, the Vaiṣṇava.” ( Padma Purāṇa )

By the grace of Viṣṇu, a Vaiṣṇava can render better service than Viṣṇu; that is the special prerogative of a Vaiṣṇava. The Lord actually wants to see His servants work more gloriously than Himself. For instance, on the Battlefield of Kurukṣetra, Śrī Kṛṣṇa provoked Arjuna to fight because all the warriors on the battlefield were to die by Kṛṣṇa’s plan. Kṛṣṇa Himself did not want to take credit; rather, He wanted Arjuna to take credit. Therefore He asked him to fight and win fame:

tasmāt tvam uttiṣṭha yaśo labhasva jitvā śatrūn bhuṅkṣva rājyaṁ samṛddham mayaivaite nihatāḥ pūrvam eva nimitta-mātraṁ bhava savya-sācin

“Therefore get up. Prepare to fight and win glory. Conquer your enemies and enjoy a flourishing kingdom. They are already put to death by My arrangement, and you, O Savyasācī, can be but an instrument in the fight.” ( Bg. 11.33 )

Thus the Supreme Personality of Godhead gives credit to a devotee who performs any heavy task perfectly. Hanumānjī, or Vajrāṅgajī, the servant of Lord Rāmacandra, serves as another example. It was Hanumānjī who jumped over the sea in one leap and reached the shore of Laṅkā from the shore of Bhārata-varṣa. When Lord Rāmacandra chose to go there, He paved the way with stones, although by His will the stones were able to float on the sea. If we simply follow Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s instructions and follow in the footsteps of Śrī Nityānanda Prabhu, this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement can advance, and even more difficult tasks can be performed by the preachers remaining faithful to the service of the Lord.

Madhya-lila 16.66

Source

নিত্যানন্দ কহে, — আমি ‘দেহ’ তুমি ‘প্রাণ’ । ‘দেহ’ ‘প্রাণ’ ভিন্ন নহে, — এই ত প্রমাণ ॥ ৬৬ ॥

nityānanda kahe, — āmi ‘deha’ tumi ‘prāṇa’ ‘deha’ ‘prāṇa’ bhinna nahe, — ei ta pramāṇa

English translation

Translation

Nityānanda Prabhu replied, “O Lord, You are the life, and I am the body. There is no difference between the body and life itself, but life is more important than the body.

Word meanings

nityānanda kahe — Lord Nityānanda Prabhu said ; āmi — I ; deha — the body ; tumi — You ; prāṇa — the life ; deha — the body ; prāṇa — the life ; bhinna nahe — not separate ; ei ta pramāṇa — this is the evidence .

Madhya-lila 16.67

Source

অচিন্ত্যশক্ত্যে কর তুমি তাহার ঘটন । যে করাহ, সেই করি, নাহিক নিয়ম ॥ ৬৭ ॥

acintya-śaktye kara tumi tāhāra ghaṭana ye karāha, sei kari, nāhika niyama

English translation

Translation

“By Your inconceivable energy, You can do whatever You like, and whatever You make Me do, I do without restriction.”

Word meanings

acintya - śaktye — by inconceivable energy ; kara — do ; tumi — You ; tāhāra — of that relationship ; ghaṭana — the operation ; ye — whatever ; karāha — You make Me do ; sei — that ; kari — I do ; nāhika — there is not ; niyama — restriction .

Purport

As stated in the beginning of Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam: tene brahma hṛdā ya ādi-kavaye. Lord Brahmā is the first living creature within this universe, and he is also the creator of this universe. How is this possible? Although he is the first living entity, Lord Brahmā is not in the category of viṣṇu-tattva. Rather, he is part of the jīva-tattva. Nonetheless, by the grace of the Lord, who instructed him through the heart ( tene brahma hṛdā ), Lord Brahmā could create a huge universe. Those who are actually pure devotees of the Lord are instructed by the Lord through the heart, where the Lord is always situated. Īśvaraḥ sarva-bhūtānāṁ hṛd-deśe ’rjuna tiṣṭhati ( Bg. 18.61 ). If he follows the instructions of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the living entity, even though an insignificant creature, can perform the most difficult tasks by the Lord’s grace. Lord Kṛṣṇa confirms this in the Bhagavad-gītā (10.10) :

teṣāṁ satata-yuktānāṁ bhajatāṁ prīti-pūrvakam dadāmi buddhi-yogaṁ taṁ yena mām upayānti te

“To those who are constantly devoted to serving Me with love, I give the understanding by which they can come to Me.”

Everything is possible for a pure devotee because he acts under the instructions of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Through His inconceivable energy, a pure devotee can perform tasks that are supposed to be very, very difficult. He can perform tasks not even previously performed by the Lord Himself. Therefore Nityānanda Prabhu told Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, ye karāha, sei kari, nāhika niyama: “I do not know by what regulative principle I am carrying out this wonderful work, but I know for certain that I will do whatever You desire.” Although the Lord wants to give all credit to His devotee, the devotee himself never takes credit, for he acts only under the Lord’s direction. Consequently all credit goes to the Lord. This is the nature of the relationship between the Lord and His devotee. The Lord wants to give all credit to His servant, but the servant does not take any credit, for he knows that everything is carried out by the Lord.

Madhya-lila 16.68

Source

তাঁরে বিদায় দিল প্রভু করি’ আলিঙ্গন । এইমত বিদায় দিল সব ভক্তগণ ॥ ৬৮ ॥

tāṅre vidāya dila prabhu kari’ āliṅgana ei-mata vidāya dila saba bhakta-gaṇa

English translation

Translation

In this way, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu embraced Nityānanda Prabhu and bade Him farewell. He then bade farewell to all the other devotees.

Word meanings

tāṅre — unto Him (Nityānanda Prabhu) ; vidāya dila — bade farewell ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; kari’ — doing ; āliṅgana — embracing ; ei - mata — in this way ; vidāya dila — bade farewell ; saba — to all ; bhakta - gaṇa — the devotees .

Madhya-lila 16.69

Source

কুলীনগ্রামী পূর্ববৎ কৈল নিবেদন । “প্রভু, আজ্ঞা কর, — আমার কর্তব্য সাধন” ॥ ৬৯ ॥

kulīna-grāmī pūrvavat kaila nivedana “prabhu, ājñā kara, — āmāra kartavya sādhana”

English translation

Translation

As in the previous year, one of the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma submitted a petition to the Lord, saying, “My Lord, kindly tell me what my duty is and how I should execute it.”

Word meanings

kulīna - grāmī — one of the residents of Kulīna-grāma ; pūrva - vat — as in the previous year ; kaila — submitted ; nivedana — petition ; prabhu — my Lord ; ājñā kara — order ; āmāra — my ; kartavya — necessary ; sādhana — performance .

Madhya-lila 16.70

Source

প্রভু কহে, — “বৈষ্ণব-সেবা, নাম-সংকীর্তন । দুই কর, শীঘ্র পাবে শ্রীকৃষ্ণ-চরণ ॥” ৭০ ॥

prabhu kahe, — “vaiṣṇava-sevā, nāma-saṅkīrtana dui kara, śīghra pābe śrī-kṛṣṇa-caraṇa”

English translation

Translation

The Lord replied, “You should engage yourself in the service of the servants of Kṛṣṇa and always chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa. If you do these two things, you will very soon attain shelter at Kṛṣṇa’s lotus feet.”

Word meanings

prabhu kahe — the Lord replied ; vaiṣṇava - sevā — service to the Vaiṣṇavas ; nāma - saṅkīrtana — chanting the holy name of the Lord ; dui kara — you perform these two things ; śīghra — very soon ; pābe — you will get ; śrī - kṛṣṇa - caraṇa — shelter at the lotus feet of the Lord, Śrī Kṛṣṇa .

Madhya-lila 16.71

Source

তেঁহো কহে, — “কে বৈষ্ণব, কি তাঁর লক্ষণ ?” তবে হাসি’ কহে প্রভু জানি’ তাঁর মন ॥ ৭১ ॥

teṅho kahe, — “ke vaiṣṇava, ki tāṅra lakṣaṇa?” tabe hāsi’ kahe prabhu jāni’ tāṅra mana

English translation

Translation

The inhabitant of Kulīna-grāma said, “Please let me know who is actually a Vaiṣṇava and what his symptoms are.” Understanding his mind, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu smiled and gave the following reply.

Word meanings

teṅho kahe — he said ; ke — who ; vaiṣṇava — a Vaiṣṇava ; ki — what ; tāṅra — of him ; lakṣaṇa — the symptoms ; tabe — thereafter ; hāsi’ — smiling ; kahe — says ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; jāni’ — knowing ; tāṅra mana — his mind .

Madhya-lila 16.72

Source

“কৃষ্ণনাম নিরন্তর যাঁহার বদনে । সেই বৈষ্ণব-শ্রেষ্ঠ, ভজ তাঁহার চরণে ॥” ৭২ ॥

“kṛṣṇa-nāma nirantara yāṅhāra vadane sei vaiṣṇava-śreṣṭha, bhaja tāṅhāra caraṇe

English translation

Translation

“A person who is always chanting the holy name of the Lord is to be considered a first-class Vaiṣṇava, and your duty is to serve his lotus feet.”

Word meanings

kṛṣṇa - nāma — the holy name of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; nirantara — incessantly ; yāṅhāra — whose ; vadane — in the mouth ; sei — such a person ; vaiṣṇava - śreṣṭha — a first-class Vaiṣṇava ; bhaja — worship ; tāṅhāra caraṇe — his lotus feet .

Purport

Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura says that any Vaiṣṇava who is constantly chanting the holy name of the Lord should be considered to have attained the second platform of Vaiṣṇavism. Such a devotee is superior to a neophyte Vaiṣṇava who has just learned to chant the holy name of the Lord. A neophyte devotee simply tries to chant the holy name, whereas the advanced devotee is accustomed to chanting and takes pleasure in it. Such an advanced devotee is called a madhyama-bhāgavata, which indicates that he has attained the intermediate stage between the neophyte and the perfect devotee. Generally a devotee in the intermediate stage becomes a preacher. A neophyte devotee or an ordinary person should worship the madhyama-bhāgavata, who is a via medium.

In his Upadeśāmṛta (5) Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī says, praṇatibhiś ca bhajantam īśam. This means that madhyama-adhikārī devotees should exchange obeisances between themselves.

The word nirantara, meaning “without cessation, continuously, constantly,” is very important in this verse. The word antara means “interval.” If one has desires other than a desire to perform devotional service — in other words, if one sometimes engages in devotional service and sometimes strives for sense gratification — his service will be interrupted. A pure devotee, therefore, should have no desire other than to serve Kṛṣṇa. He should be above fruitive activity and speculative knowledge. In his Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.1.11), Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī says:

anyābhilāṣitā-śūnyaṁ jñāna-karmādy-anāvṛtam ānukūlyena kṛṣṇānu- śīlanaṁ bhaktir uttamā

This is the platform of pure devotional service. One should not be motivated by fruitive activity or mental speculation but should simply serve Kṛṣṇa favorably. That is first-class devotion.

Another meaning of antara is “this body.” The body is an impediment to self-realization because it is always engaged in sense gratification. Similarly, antara means “money.” If money is not used in Kṛṣṇa’s service, it is also an impediment. Antara also means janatā, “people in general.” The association of ordinary persons may destroy the principles of devotional service. Similarly, antara may mean “greed” — greed to acquire more money or enjoy more sense gratification. Finally, the word antara may also mean “atheistic ideas,” by which one considers the temple Deity to be made of stone, wood or gold. All of these are impediments. The Deity in the temple is not material — He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself. Similarly, considering the spiritual master an ordinary human being ( guruṣu nara-matiḥ ) is also an impediment. Nor should one consider a Vaiṣṇava a member of a particular caste or nation. Nor should a Vaiṣṇava be considered material. Caraṇāmṛta should not be considered ordinary drinking water, and the holy name of the Lord should not be considered an ordinary sound vibration. Nor should one look on Lord Kṛṣṇa as an ordinary human being, for He is the origin of all viṣṇu-tattvas; nor should one regard the Supreme Lord as a demigod. Intermingling the spiritual with the material causes one to look on transcendence as material and the mundane as spiritual. This is all due to a poor fund of knowledge. One should not consider Lord Viṣṇu and things related to Him as being different. All this is offensive.

In the Bhakti-sandarbha (265), Śrīla Jīva Gosvāmī writes: nāmaikaṁ yasya vāci smaraṇa-patha-gatam ity-ādau deha-draviṇādi-nimittaka-‘pāṣaṇḍa’-śabdena ca daśa aparādhā lakṣyante, pāṣaṇḍa-mayatvāt teṣām. “In the verse beginning nāmaikaṁ yasya, we find the word pāṣaṇḍa [‘godlessness’]. The word literally indicates misuse of one’s body or property, but in that verse it implies the ten offenses against the Lord’s holy name, since each of these leads to such godless behavior.”

The Māyāvādīs look on Viṣṇu and Vaiṣṇavas imperfectly due to their poor fund of knowledge, and this is condemned. In Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (11.2.46) , the intermediate Vaiṣṇava is described as follows:

īśvare tad-adhīneṣu bāliśeṣu dviṣatsu ca prema-maitrī-kṛpopekṣā yaḥ karoti sa madhyamaḥ

“The intermediate Vaiṣṇava has to love God, make friends with the devotees, instruct the innocent and reject jealous people.” These are the four functions of the Vaiṣṇava in the intermediate stage. In the Caitanya-caritāmṛta ( Madhya 22.64) Śrī Sanātana Gosvāmī is taught:

śraddhāvān jana haya bhakti-adhikārī ‘uttama’, ‘madhyama’, ‘kaniṣṭha’ — śraddhā-anusārī

“One who is faithful is a proper candidate for devotional service. In terms of one’s degree of faith in devotional service, one is a first-class, second-class or neophyte Vaiṣṇava.”

śāstra-yukti nāhi jāne dṛḍha, śraddhāvān ‘madhyama-adhikārī’ sei mahā-bhāgyavān

“One who has attained the intermediate stage is not very advanced in śāstric knowledge, but he has firm faith in the Lord. Such a person is very fortunate to be situated on the intermediate platform.” (Cc. Madhya 22.67)

rati-prema-tāratamye bhakta-taratama

“Attraction and love for God are the ultimate goal of devotional service. The degrees of such attraction and love distinguish the different stages of devotion — neophyte, intermediate and perfectional.” (Cc. Madhya 22.71) An intermediate devotee is greatly attracted to chanting the holy name, and by chanting he is elevated to the platform of love. If one chants the holy name of the Lord with great attachment, he can understand his position as an eternal servant of the spiritual master, other Vaiṣṇavas and Kṛṣṇa Himself. Thus the intermediate Vaiṣṇava considers himself kṛṣṇa-dāsa, Kṛṣṇa’s servant. He therefore preaches Kṛṣṇa consciousness to innocent neophytes and stresses the importance of chanting the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra. An intermediate devotee can identify the nondevotee or motivated devotee. The motivated devotee or the nondevotee are on the material platform, and they are called prākṛta. The intermediate devotee does not mix with such materialistic people. However, he understands that the Supreme Personality of Godhead and everything related to Him are on the same transcendental platform. Actually none of them are mundane.

Madhya-lila 16.73

Source

বর্ষান্তরে পুনঃ তাঁরা ঐছে প্রশ্ন কৈল । বৈষ্ণবের তারতম্য প্রভু শিখাইল ॥ ৭৩ ॥

varṣāntare punaḥ tāṅrā aiche praśna kaila vaiṣṇavera tāratamya prabhu śikhāila

English translation

Translation

The following year, the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma again asked the Lord the same question. Hearing this question, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu again taught them about the different types of Vaiṣṇavas.

Word meanings

varṣa - antare — after one year ; punaḥ — again ; tāṅrā — they (the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma) ; aiche — such ; praśna — a question ; kaila — made ; vaiṣṇavera — of Vaiṣṇavas ; tāratamya — upper and lower gradations ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śikhāila — taught .

Madhya-lila 16.74

Source

“যাঁহার দর্শনে মুখে আইসে কৃষ্ণনাম । তাঁহারে জানিহ তুমি ‘বৈষ্ণব-প্রধান’ ॥” ৭৪ ॥

yāṅhāra darśane mukhe āise kṛṣṇa-nāma tāṅhāre jāniha tumi ‘vaiṣṇava-pradhāna’

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “A first-class Vaiṣṇava is he whose very presence makes others chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa.”

Word meanings

yāṅhāra darśane — by the sight of whom ; mukhe — in the mouth ; āise — automatically awakens ; kṛṣṇa - nāma — the holy name of Kṛṣṇa ; tāṅhāre — him ; jāniha — must know ; tumi — you ; vaiṣṇava - pradhāna — the first-class Vaiṣṇava .

Purport

Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura says that if an observer immediately remembers the holy name of Kṛṣṇa upon seeing a Vaiṣṇava, that Vaiṣṇava should be considered a mahā-bhāgavata, a first-class devotee. Such a Vaiṣṇava is always aware of his Kṛṣṇa conscious duty, and he is enlightened in self-realization. He is always in love with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, and this love is without adulteration. Because of this love, he is always awake to transcendental realization. Because he knows that Kṛṣṇa consciousness is the basis of knowledge and action, he sees everything as being connected with Kṛṣṇa. Such a person is able to chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa perfectly. Such a mahā-bhāgavata Vaiṣṇava has the transcendental eyes to see who is sleeping under the spell of māyā, and he engages himself in awakening sleeping conditioned beings by spreading the knowledge of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. He opens eyes that are closed by forgetfulness of Kṛṣṇa. Thus the living entity is liberated from the dullness of material energy and is engaged fully in the service of the Lord. The madhyama-adhikārī Vaiṣṇava can awaken others to Kṛṣṇa consciousness and engage them in duties whereby they can advance. It is therefore said in the Caitanya-caritāmṛta ( Madhya-līlā, chapter six, verse 279):

lohāke yāvat sparśi’ hema nāhi kare tāvat sparśa-maṇi keha cinite nā pāre

“One cannot understand the value of touchstone until it turns iron into gold.” One should judge by action, not by promises. A mahā-bhāgavata can turn a living entity from abominable material life to the Lord’s service. This is the test of a mahā-bhāgavata. Although preaching is not meant for a mahā-bhāgavata, a mahā-bhāgavata can descend to the platform of madhyama-bhāgavata just to convert others to Vaiṣṇavism. Actually a mahā-bhāgavata is fit to spread Kṛṣṇa consciousness, but he does not distinguish where Kṛṣṇa consciousness should be spread from where it should not. He thinks that everyone is competent to accept Kṛṣṇa consciousness if the chance is provided. A neophyte and an intermediate devotee should always be eager to hear the mahā-bhāgavata and serve him in every respect. The neophyte and intermediate devotees can gradually rise to the platform of uttama-adhikārī and become first-class devotees. Symptoms of a first-class devotee are given in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (11.2.45) :

sarva-bhūteṣu yaḥ paśyed bhagavad-bhāvam ātmanaḥ bhūtāni bhagavaty ātmany eṣa bhāgavatottamaḥ

“The most advanced devotee sees within everything the soul of all souls, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Śrī Kṛṣṇa. Consequently, he sees everything in relation to the Supreme Lord and understands that everything that exists is eternally situated within the Lord.”

When teaching Sanātana Gosvāmī, the Lord further said:

śāstra-yuktye sunipuṇa, dṛḍha-śraddhā yāṅra ‘uttama-adhikārī’ se tāraye saṁsāra

“One who is expert in the Vedic literature and has full faith in the Supreme Lord is an uttama-adhikārī, a first-class Vaiṣṇava, a topmost Vaiṣṇava who can deliver the whole world and turn everyone to Kṛṣṇa consciousness.” (Cc. Madhya 22.65) With great love and affection, the mahā-bhāgavata observes the Supreme Personality of Godhead, devotional service and the devotee. He observes nothing beyond Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa consciousness and Kṛṣṇa’s devotees. The mahā-bhāgavata knows that everyone is engaged in the Lord’s service in different ways. He therefore descends to the middle platform to elevate everyone to the Kṛṣṇa conscious position.

Madhya-lila 16.75

Source

ক্রম করি’ কহে প্রভু ‘বৈষ্ণব’-লক্ষণ । ‘বৈষ্ণব’, ‘বৈষ্ণবতর’, আর ‘বৈষ্ণবতম’ ॥ ৭৫ ॥

krama kari’ kahe prabhu ‘vaiṣṇava’-lakṣaṇa ‘vaiṣṇava’, ‘vaiṣṇavatara’, āra ‘vaiṣṇavatama’

English translation

Translation

In this way, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu taught the distinctions between different types of Vaiṣṇavas — the Vaiṣṇava, Vaiṣṇavatara and Vaiṣṇavatama. He thus successively explained all the symptoms of a Vaiṣṇava to the inhabitants of Kulīna-grāma.

Word meanings

krama kari’ — dividing according to grades ; kahe prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu spoke ; vaiṣṇava - lakṣaṇa — the symptoms of Vaiṣṇavas ; vaiṣṇava — the ordinary Vaiṣṇava (the positive platform) ; vaiṣṇava - tara — the better Vaiṣṇava (the comparative platform) ; āra — and ; vaiṣṇava - tama — the best Vaiṣṇava (the superlative platform) .

Madhya-lila 16.76

Source

এইমত সব বৈষ্ণব গৌড়ে চলিলা । বিদ্যানিধি সে বৎসর নীলাদ্রি রহিলা ॥ ৭৬ ॥

ei-mata saba vaiṣṇava gauḍe calilā vidyānidhi se vatsara nīlādri rahilā

English translation

Translation

Finally all the Vaiṣṇavas returned to Bengal, but that year Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi remained at Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; saba — all ; vaiṣṇava — devotees ; gauḍe calilā — returned to Bengal ; vidyānidhi — Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi ; se vatsara — that year ; nīlādri rahilā — remained at Nīlādri, Jagannātha Purī .

Madhya-lila 16.77

Source

স্বরূপ-সহিত তাঁর হয় সখ্য-প্রীতি । দুই-জনায় কৃষ্ণ-কথায় একত্রই স্থিতি ॥ ৭৭ ॥

svarūpa-sahita tāṅra haya sakhya-prīti dui-janāya kṛṣṇa-kathāya ekatra-i sthiti

English translation

Translation

Svarūpa Dāmodara Gosvāmī and Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi had a friendly, intimate relationship, and as far as discussing topics about Kṛṣṇa, they were situated on the same platform.

Word meanings

svarūpa - sahita — with Svarūpa Dāmodara Gosvāmī ; tāṅra — his ; haya — there is ; sakhya - prīti — very intimate friendship ; dui - janāya — both of them ; kṛṣṇa - kathāya — in topics of Kṛṣṇa ; ekatra - i — on the same level ; sthiti — position .

Madhya-lila 16.78

Source

গদাধর-পণ্ডিতে তেঁহো পুনঃ মন্ত্র দিল । ওড়ন-ষষ্ঠীর দিনে যাত্রা যে দেখিল ॥ ৭৮ ॥

gadādhara-paṇḍite teṅho punaḥ mantra dila oḍana-ṣaṣṭhīra dine yātrā ye dekhila

English translation

Translation

Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi initiated Gadādhara Paṇḍita for the second time, and on the day of Oḍana-ṣaṣṭhī Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi saw the festival.

Word meanings

gadādhara - paṇḍite — unto Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; teṅho — Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi ; punaḥ — again, the second ; mantra — initiation ; dila — gave ; oḍana - ṣaṣṭhīra dine — on the day of performing the Oḍana-ṣaṣṭhī function ; yātrā — festival ; ye — indeed ; dekhila — he saw .

Purport

At the beginning of winter, there is a ceremony known as the Oḍana-ṣaṣṭhī. This ceremony indicates that from that day forward, a winter covering should be given to Lord Jagannātha. That covering is directly purchased from a weaver. According to the arcana-mārga, a cloth should first be washed to remove all the starch, and then it can be used to cover the Lord. Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi saw that the priest neglected to wash the cloth before covering Lord Jagannātha. Since he wanted to find some fault in the devotees, he became indignant.

Madhya-lila 16.79

Source

জগন্নাথ পরেন তথা ‘মাড়ুয়া’ বসন । দেখিয়া সঘৃণ হৈল বিদ্যানিধির মন ॥ ৭৯ ॥

jagannātha parena tathā ‘māḍuyā’ vasana dekhiyā saghṛṇa haila vidyānidhira mana

English translation

Translation

When Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi saw that Lord Jagannātha was given a starched garment, he became a little hateful. In this way his mind was polluted.

Word meanings

jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; parena — puts on ; tathā — there ; māḍuyā vasana — cloth with starch ; dekhiyā — seeing ; sa - ghṛṇa — with hatred ; haila — was ; vidyānidhira mana — the mind of Vidyānidhi .

Madhya-lila 16.80

Source

সেই রাত্র্যে জগন্নাথ-বলাই আসিয়া । দুই-ভাই চড়া’ন তাঁরে হাসিয়া হাসিয়া ॥ ৮০ ॥

sei rātrye jagannātha-balāi āsiyā dui-bhāi caḍā’na tāṅre hāsiyā hāsiyā

English translation

Translation

That night the brothers Lord Jagannātha and Balarāma came to Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi and, smiling, began to slap him.

Word meanings

sei rātrye — on that night ; jagannātha — Lord Jagannātha ; balāi — Lord Balarāma ; āsiyā — coming ; dui - bhāi — both brothers ; caḍā’na — slapped ; tāṅre — him ; hāsiyā hāsiyā — smiling .

Madhya-lila 16.81

Source

গাল ফুলিল, আচার্য অন্তরে উল্লাস । বিস্তারি’ বর্ণিয়াছেন বৃন্দাবন-দাস ॥ ৮১ ॥

gāla phulila, ācārya antare ullāsa vistāri’ varṇiyāchena vṛndāvana-dāsa

English translation

Translation

Although his cheeks were swollen from the slapping, Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi was very happy within. This incident has been elaborately described by Ṭhākura Vṛndāvana dāsa.

Word meanings

gāla — the cheeks ; phulila — became swollen ; ācārya — Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi ; antare — within the heart ; ullāsa — very happy ; vistāri’ — elaborating ; varṇiyāchena — has narrated ; vṛndāvana - dāsa — Śrīla Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura .

Madhya-lila 16.82

Source

এইমত প্রত্যব্দ আইসে গৌড়ের ভক্তগণ । প্রভু-সঙ্গে রহি’ করে যাত্রা-দরশন ॥ ৮২ ॥

ei-mata pratyabda āise gauḍera bhakta-gaṇa prabhu-saṅge rahi’ kare yātrā-daraśana

English translation

Translation

Every year the devotees of Bengal would come and stay with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu to see the Ratha-yātrā festival.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; prati - abda — every year ; āise — come ; gauḍera — of Bengal ; bhakta - gaṇa — the devotees ; prabhu - saṅge — with Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; rahi’ — residing ; kare — do ; yātrā - daraśana — observing the Ratha-yātrā festival .

Madhya-lila 16.83

Source

তার মধ্যে যে যে বর্ষে আছয়ে বিশেষ । বিস্তারিয়া আগে তাহা কহিব নিঃশেষ ॥ ৮৩ ॥

tāra madhye ye ye varṣe āchaye viśeṣa vistāriyā āge tāhā kahiba niḥśeṣa

English translation

Translation

Whatever happened during those years that is worth noting shall be described later.

Word meanings

tāra madhye — within those episodes ; ye ye — whatever ; varṣe — in years ; āchaye — there is ; viśeṣa — particular occurrence ; vistāriyā — elaborating ; āge — ahead ; tāhā — that ; kahiba — I shall say ; niḥśeṣa — completely .

Madhya-lila 16.84

Source

এইমত মহাপ্রভুর চারি বৎসর গেল । দক্ষিণ যাঞা আসিতে দুই বৎসর লাগিল ॥ ৮৪ ॥

ei-mata mahāprabhura cāri vatsara gela dakṣiṇa yāñā āsite dui vatsara lāgila

English translation

Translation

Thus Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu passed four years. He spent the first two years on His tour in South India.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; mahāprabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; cāri — four ; vatsara — years ; gela — passed ; dakṣiṇa yāñā — after touring southern India ; āsite — to come back ; dui vatsara lāgila — He took two years .

Madhya-lila 16.85

Source

আর দুই বৎসর চাহে বৃন্দাবন যাইতে । রামানন্দ-হঠে প্রভু না পারে চলিতে ॥ ৮৫ ॥

āra dui vatsara cāhe vṛndāvana yāite rāmānanda-haṭhe prabhu nā pāre calite

English translation

Translation

The other two years, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu wanted to go to Vṛndāvana, but He could not leave Jagannātha Purī because of Rāmānanda Rāya’s tricks.

Word meanings

āra dui vatsara — another two years ; cāhe — He wanted ; vṛndāvana yāite — to go to Vṛndāvana ; rāmānanda - haṭhe — by the tricks of Rāmānanda Rāya ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nā pāre — was not able ; calite — to go .

Madhya-lila 16.86

Source

পঞ্চম বৎসরে গৌড়ের ভক্তগণ আইলা । রথ দেখি’ না রহিলা, গৌড়েরে চলিলা ॥ ৮৬ ॥

pañcama vatsare gauḍera bhakta-gaṇa āilā ratha dekhi’ nā rahilā, gauḍere calilā

English translation

Translation

During the fifth year, the devotees from Bengal came to see the Ratha-yātrā festival. After seeing it, they did not stay but returned to Bengal.

Word meanings

pañcama vatsare — in the fifth year ; gauḍera — of Bengal ; bhakta - gaṇa — the devotees ; āilā — came ; ratha dekhi’ — seeing the Ratha-yātrā festival ; nā rahilā — did not stay ; gauḍere calilā — returned to Bengal .

Madhya-lila 16.87

Source

তবে প্রভু সার্বভৌম-রামানন্দ-স্থানে । আলিঙ্গন করি’ কহে মধুর বচনে ॥ ৮৭ ॥

tabe prabhu sārvabhauma-rāmānanda-sthāne āliṅgana kari’ kahe madhura vacane

English translation

Translation

Then Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu placed a proposal before Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and Rāmānanda Rāya. He embraced them and spoke sweet words.

Word meanings

tabe — then ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sārvabhauma - rāmānanda - sthāne — before Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and Rāmānanda Rāya ; āliṅgana kari’ — embracing ; kahe — says ; madhura vacane — sweet words .

Madhya-lila 16.88

Source

বহুত উৎকণ্ঠা মোর যাইতে বৃন্দাবন । তোমার হঠে দুই বৎসর না কৈলুঁ গমন ॥ ৮৮ ॥

bahuta utkaṇṭhā mora yāite vṛndāvana tomāra haṭhe dui vatsara nā kailuṅ gamana

English translation

Translation

Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “My desire to go to Vṛndāvana has very much increased. Because of your tricks, I have not been able to go there for the past two years.

Word meanings

bahuta utkaṇṭhā — great anxiety ; mora — My ; yāite vṛndāvana — to go to Vṛndāvana ; tomāra haṭhe — by your tricks ; dui vatsara — for two years ; nā kailuṅ — I did not do ; gamana — going .

Madhya-lila 16.89

Source

অবশ্য চলিব, দুঁহে করহ সম্মতি । তোমা-দুঁহা বিনা মোর নাহি অন্য গতি ॥ ৮৯ ॥

avaśya caliba, duṅhe karaha sammati tomā-duṅhā vinā mora nāhi anya gati

English translation

Translation

“This time I must go. Will you please give Me permission? Save for you two, I have no other resort.

Word meanings

avaśya — certainly ; caliba — I shall go ; duṅhe — both of you ; karaha sammati — kindly agree to this proposal ; tomā - duṅhā vinā — except you two ; mora — My ; nāhi — there is not ; anya gati — other resort .

Madhya-lila 16.90

Source

গৌড়-দেশে হয় মোর ‘দুই সমাশ্রয়’ । ‘জননী’ ‘জাহ্নবী’ — এই দুই দয়াময় ॥ ৯০ ॥

gauḍa-deśe haya mora ‘dui samāśraya’ ‘jananī’ ‘jāhnavī’, — ei dui dayāmaya

English translation

Translation

“In Bengal I have two shelters — My mother and the river Ganges. Both of them are very merciful.

Word meanings

gauḍa - deśe — in Bengal ; haya — there are ; mora — My ; dui — two ; samāśraya — shelters ; jananī — the mother ; jāhnavī — mother Ganges ; ei dui — these two ; dayā - maya — very merciful .

Madhya-lila 16.91

Source

গৌড়-দেশ দিয়া যাব তাঁ-সবা দেখিয়া । তুমি দুঁহে আজ্ঞা দেহ’ পরসন্ন হঞা ॥ ৯১ ॥

gauḍa-deśa diyā yāba tāṅ-sabā dekhiyā tumi duṅhe ājñā deha’ parasanna hañā

English translation

Translation

“I shall go to Vṛndāvana through Bengal and see both My mother and the river Ganges. Now would you two be pleased to give Me permission?”

Word meanings

gauḍa - deśa — the country known as Bengal ; diyā — through ; yāba — I shall go ; tāṅ - sabā — both of them ; dekhiyā — seeing ; tumi duṅhe — both of you ; ājñā deha’ — give Me permission ; parasanna hañā — being very pleased .

Madhya-lila 16.92

Source

শুনিয়া প্রভুর বাণী মনে বিচারয় । প্রভু-সনে অতি হঠ কভু ভাল নয় ॥ ৯২ ॥

śuniyā prabhura vāṇī mane vicāraya prabhu-sane ati haṭha kabhu bhāla naya

English translation

Translation

When Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya and Rāmānanda Rāya heard these words, they began to consider that it was not at all good that they had played so many tricks on the Lord.

Word meanings

śuniyā — hearing ; prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; vāṇī — the words ; mane — in their minds ; vicāraya — considered ; prabhu - sane — with Lord Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ati — very much ; haṭha — tricks ; kabhu — at any time ; bhāla naya — is not very good .

Madhya-lila 16.93

Source

দুঁহে কহে, — এবে বর্ষা চলিতে নারিবা । বিজয়া-দশমী আইলে অবশ্য চলিবা ॥ ৯৩ ॥

duṅhe kahe, — ebe varṣā, calite nāribā vijayā-daśamī āile avaśya calibā

English translation

Translation

They both said, “Now that the rainy season is here, it will be difficult for You to travel. It is better to wait for Vijayā-daśamī before departing for Vṛndāvana.”

Word meanings

duṅhe kahe — both of them said ; ebe — now ; varṣā — rainy season ; calite nāribā — You will not be able to go ; vijayā - daśamī — the Vijayā-daśamī day ; āile — when it arrives ; avaśya — certainly ; calibā — You will go .

Madhya-lila 16.94

Source

আনন্দে মহাপ্রভু বর্ষা কৈল সমাধান । বিজয়া-দশমী-দিনে করিল পয়ান ॥ ৯৪ ॥

ānande mahāprabhu varṣā kaila samādhāna vijayā-daśamī-dine karila payāna

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was very pleased to thus receive their permission. He waited until the rainy season passed, and when the day of Vijayā-daśamī arrived, He departed for Vṛndāvana.

Word meanings

ānande — in great pleasure ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; varṣā — the rainy season ; kaila samādhāna — passed ; vijayā - daśamī - dine — on Vijayā-daśamī, the day when the victory was won by Lord Rāmacandra ; karila payāna — He departed .

Madhya-lila 16.95

Source

জগন্নাথের প্রসাদ প্রভু যত পাঞাছিল । কড়ার, চন্দন, ডোর, সব সঙ্গে লৈল ॥ ৯৫ ॥

jagannāthera prasāda prabhu yata pāñāchila kaḍāra, candana, ḍora, saba saṅge laila

English translation

Translation

The Lord collected whatever remnants of food were left by Lord Jagannātha. He also took remnants of the Lord’s kaḍāra ointment, sandalwood and ropes with Him.

Word meanings

jagannāthera — of Lord Jagannātha ; prasāda — the remnants of food ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yata — all ; pāñāchila — had obtained ; kaḍāra — a kind of tilaka ; candana — sandalwood ; ḍora — ropes ; saba — all ; saṅge laila — He took with Him .

Madhya-lila 16.96

Source

জগন্নাথে আজ্ঞা মাগি’ প্রভাতে চলিলা । উড়িয়া-ভক্তগণ সঙ্গে পাছে চলি’ আইলা ॥ ৯৬ ॥

jagannāthe ājñā māgi’ prabhāte calilā uḍiyā-bhakta-gaṇa saṅge pāche cali’ āilā

English translation

Translation

After taking Lord Jagannātha’s permission early in the morning, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu departed, and all the devotees of Orissa began following Him.

Word meanings

jagannāthe — from Lord Jagannātha ; ājñā māgi’ — taking permission ; prabhāte — early in the morning ; calilā — departed ; uḍiyā - bhakta - gaṇa — all the devotees of Orissa ; saṅge — with Him ; pāche — following ; cali’ āilā — went .

Madhya-lila 16.97

Source

উড়িয়া-ভক্তগণে প্রভু যত্নে নিবারিলা । নিজগণ-সঙ্গে প্রভু ‘ভবানীপুর’ আইলা ॥ ৯৭ ॥

uḍiyā-bhakta-gaṇe prabhu yatne nivārilā nija-gaṇa-saṅge prabhu ‘bhavānīpura’ āilā

English translation

Translation

With great care Caitanya Mahāprabhu forbade the Orissan devotees to follow Him. Then, accompanied by His personal associates, He first went to Bhavānīpura.

Word meanings

uḍiyā - bhakta - gaṇe — the devotees of Orissa ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yatne — with great care ; nivārilā — stopped ; nija - gaṇa - saṅge — with His personal associates ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bhavānīpura āilā — came to Bhavānīpura .

Purport

One goes through Bhavānīpura before reaching a well-known place named Jānkādei-pura, or Jānakīdevī-pura.

Madhya-lila 16.98

Source

রামানন্দ আইলা পাছে দোলায় চড়িয়া । বাণীনাথ বহু প্রসাদ দিল পাঠাঞা ॥ ৯৮ ॥

rāmānanda āilā pāche dolāya caḍiyā vāṇīnātha bahu prasāda dila pāṭhāñā

English translation

Translation

After Lord Caitanya reached Bhavānīpura, Rāmānanda Rāya arrived on his palanquin, and Vāṇīnātha Rāya had a large quantity of prasādam sent to the Lord.

Word meanings

rāmānanda — Rāmānanda Rāya ; āilā — came ; pāche — behind ; dolāya caḍiyā — riding on a palanquin ; vāṇīnātha — Vāṇīnātha Rāya ; bahu — a large quantity of ; prasāda — remnants of the food of Jagannātha ; dila — gave ; pāṭhāñā — sending .

Madhya-lila 16.99

Source

প্রসাদ ভোজন করি’ তথায় রহিলা । প্রাতঃকালে চলি’ প্রভু ‘ভুবনেশ্বর’ আইলা ॥ ৯৯ ॥

prasāda bhojana kari’ tathāya rahilā prātaḥ-kāle cali’ prabhu ‘bhuvaneśvara’ āilā

English translation

Translation

After taking prasādam, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu remained there for the night. Early in the morning He began walking, and finally He reached Bhuvaneśvara.

Word meanings

prasāda bhojana kari’ — after taking the prasādam ; tathāya rahilā — He stayed there ; prātaḥ - kāle — early in the morning ; cali’ — walking ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bhuvaneśvara āilā — reached the place known as Bhuvaneśvara .

Madhya-lila 16.100

Source

‘কটকে’ আসিয়া কৈল ‘গোপাল’ দরশন । স্বপ্নেশ্বর-বিপ্র কৈল প্রভুর নিমন্ত্রণ ॥ ১০০ ॥

‘kaṭake’ āsiyā kaila ‘gopāla’ daraśana svapneśvara-vipra kaila prabhura nimantraṇa

English translation

Translation

After reaching the city of Kaṭaka, He saw the temple of Gopāla, and a brāhmaṇa there named Svapneśvara invited the Lord to eat.

Word meanings

kaṭake — to the city of Kaṭaka ; āsiyā — coming ; kaila — did ; gopāla daraśana — seeing Lord Gopāla ; svapneśvara - vipra — the brāhmaṇa named Svapneśvara ; kaila — did ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nimantraṇa — invitation .

Madhya-lila 16.101

Source

রামানন্দ-রায় সব-গণে নিমন্ত্রিল । বাহির উদ্যানে আসি’ প্রভু বাসা কৈল ॥ ১০১ ॥

rāmānanda-rāya saba-gaṇe nimantrila bāhira udyāne āsi’ prabhu vāsā kaila

English translation

Translation

Rāmānanda Rāya invited all the others for their meals, and Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu made His resting place in a garden outside the temple.

Word meanings

rāmānanda - rāya — Rāmānanda Rāya ; saba - gaṇe — all the followers of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nimantrila — invited ; bāhira udyāne — in an outside garden ; āsi’ — coming ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; vāsā kaila — made His resting place .

Madhya-lila 16.102

Source

ভিক্ষা করি’ বকুল-তলে করিলা বিশ্রাম । প্রতাপরুদ্র-ঠাঞি রায় করিল পয়ান ॥ ১০২ ॥

bhikṣā kari’ bakula-tale karilā viśrāma pratāparudra-ṭhāñi rāya karila payāna

English translation

Translation

While Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was taking rest beneath a bakula tree, Rāmānanda Rāya immediately went to Mahārāja Pratāparudra.

Word meanings

bhikṣā kari’ — after taking lunch ; bakula - tale — underneath a bakula flower tree ; karilā viśrāma — took rest ; pratāparudra - ṭhāñi — to the presence of Mahārāja Pratāparudra ; rāya — Rāmānanda Rāya ; karila payāna — departed .

Madhya-lila 16.103

Source

শুনি’ আনন্দিত রাজা অতিশীঘ্র আইলা । প্রভু দেখি’ দণ্ডবৎ ভূমেতে পড়িলা ॥ ১০৩ ॥

śuni’ ānandita rājā ati-śīghra āilā prabhu dekhi’ daṇḍavat bhūmete paḍilā

English translation

Translation

The King was very happy to hear the news, and he hastily went there. Upon seeing the Lord, he fell flat to offer Him obeisances.

Word meanings

śuni’ — hearing ; ānandita — very pleased ; rājā — the King ; ati - śīghra — hastily ; āilā — came ; prabhu dekhi’ — seeing Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; daṇḍavat — obeisances offered falling flat ; bhūmete — on the ground ; paḍilā — fell down .

Madhya-lila 16.104

Source

পুনঃ উঠে, পুনঃ পড়ে প্রণয়-বিহ্বল । স্তুতি করে, পুলকাঙ্গ, পড়ে অশ্রুজল ॥ ১০৪ ॥

punaḥ uṭhe, punaḥ paḍe praṇaya-vihvala stuti kare, pulakāṅga, paḍe aśru-jala

English translation

Translation

Being overwhelmed with love, the King again and again got up and fell down. When he offered prayers, his whole body shivered, and tears fell from his eyes.

Word meanings

punaḥ — again ; uṭhe — he arose ; punaḥ — again ; paḍe — he fell down ; praṇaya - vihvala — overwhelmed with love ; stuti kare — offers prayers ; pulaka - aṅga — the entire body quivering in joy ; paḍe — fell down ; aśru - jala — tears .

Madhya-lila 16.105

Source

তাঁর ভক্তি দেখি’ প্রভুর তুষ্ট হৈল মন । উঠি’ মহাপ্রভু তাঁরে কৈলা আলিঙ্গন ॥ ১০৫ ॥

tāṅra bhakti dekhi’ prabhura tuṣṭa haila mana uthi’ mahāprabhu tāṅre kailā āliṅgana

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was very pleased to see the devotion of the King, and He therefore stood up and embraced him.

Word meanings

tāṅra bhakti — his devotion ; dekhi’ — seeing ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tuṣṭa — pleased ; haila — was ; mana — mind ; uṭhi’ — standing up ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — him ; kailā āliṅgana — embraced .

Madhya-lila 16.106

Source

পুনঃ স্তুতি করি’ রাজা করয়ে প্রণাম । প্রভু-কৃপা-অশ্রুতে তাঁর দেহ হৈল স্নান ॥ ১০৬ ॥

punaḥ stuti kari’ rājā karaye praṇāma prabhu-kṛpā-aśrute tāṅra deha haila snāna

English translation

Translation

When the Lord embraced the King, the King again and again offered prayers and obeisances. In this way, the Lord’s mercy brought tears from the King, and the Lord’s body was bathed with these tears.

Word meanings

punaḥ — again ; stuti kari’ — offering prayers ; rājā — the King ; karaye pranāma — offered obeisances ; prabhu kṛpā — of the mercy of the Lord ; aśrute — by the tears ; tāṅra — of the Lord ; deha — the body ; haila — became ; snāna — bathed .

Madhya-lila 16.107

Source

সুস্থ করি, রামানন্দ রাজারে বসাইলা । কায়মনোবাক্যে প্রভু তাঁরে কৃপা কৈলা ॥ ১০৭ ॥

sustha kari, rāmānanda rājāre vasāilā kāya-mano-vākye prabhu tāṅre kṛpā kailā

English translation

Translation

Finally Rāmānanda Rāya pacified the King and made him sit down. The Lord bestowed mercy upon him through His body, mind and words.

Word meanings

sustha kari — comforting him ; rāmānanda — Rāya Rāmānanda ; rājāre vasāilā — made the King sit down ; kāya - mano - vākye — with body, mind and words ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — unto the King ; kṛpā kailā — showed His mercy .

Madhya-lila 16.108

Source

ঐছে তাঁহারে কৃপা কৈল গৌররায় । “প্রতাপরুদ্র-সংত্রাতা” নাম হৈল যায় ॥ ১০৮ ॥

aiche tāṅhāre kṛpā kaila gaurarāya “pratāparudra-santrātā” nāma haila yāya

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu showed such mercy to the King that from that day on the Lord became known as Pratāparudra-santrātā, the deliverer of Mahārāja Pratāparudra.

Word meanings

aiche — such ; tāṅhāre — unto the King ; kṛpā — mercy ; kaila — showed ; gaurarāya — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; pratāparudra - santrātā — the deliverer of Mahārāja Pratāparudra ; nāma — the name ; haila — became ; yāya — by which .

Madhya-lila 16.109

Source

রাজ-পাত্রগণ কৈল প্রভুর বন্দন । রাজারে বিদায় দিলা শচীর নন্দন ॥ ১০৯ ॥

rāja-pātra-gaṇa kaila prabhura vandana rājāre vidāya dilā śacīra nandana

English translation

Translation

All the governmental officers also paid their respects to the Lord, and finally the King and his men were bade farewell by the son of mother Śacī.

Word meanings

rāja - pātra - gaṇa — the officers of the King ; kaila — did ; prabhura vandana — glorifying the Lord ; rājāre — unto the King ; vidāya dilā — bade farewell ; śacīra nandana — the son of mother Śacī .

Madhya-lila 16.110

Source

বাহিরে আসি’ রাজা আজ্ঞা-পত্র লেখাইল । নিজ-রাজ্যে যত ‘বিষয়ী’, তাহারে পাঠাইল ॥ ১১০ ॥

bāhire āsi’ rājā ājñā-patra lekhāila nija-rājye yata ‘viṣayī’, tāhāre pāṭhāila

English translation

Translation

The King then went outside and had orders written down and sent to the government servants within his kingdom.

Word meanings

bāhire āsi’ — coming outside ; rājā — the King ; ājñā - patra — letters of command ; lekhāila — had written ; nija - rājye — in his own kingdom ; yata — all ; viṣayī — government servants ; tāhāre — unto them ; pāṭhāila — sent .

Madhya-lila 16.111

Source

‘গ্রামে-গ্রামে’ নূতন আবাস করিবা । পাঁচ-সাত নব্যগৃহে সামগ্র্যে ভরিবা ॥ ১১১ ॥

‘grāme-grāme’ nūtana āvāsa karibā pāṅca-sāta navya-gṛhe sāmagrye bharibā

English translation

Translation

His orders read: “In every village you should construct new residences, and in five or seven new houses you should store all kinds of food.

Word meanings

grāme - grāme — in every village ; nūtana — new ; āvāsa — residential places ; karibā — you should construct ; pāṅca - sāta — five to seven ; navya - gṛhe — in new houses ; sāmagrye — with food ; bharibā — you should fill .

Madhya-lila 16.112

Source

আপনি প্রভুকে লঞা তাহাঁ উত্তরিবা । রাত্রি-দিবা বেত্রহস্তে সেবায় রহিবা ॥ ১১২ ॥

āpani prabhuke lañā tāhāṅ uttaribā rātri-dibā vetra-haste sevāya rahibā

English translation

Translation

“You should personally take the Lord to these newly constructed houses. Day and night you should engage in His service with a stick in your hands.”

Word meanings

āpani — personally, yourself ; prabhuke — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; lañā — taking ; tāhāṅ uttaribā — you should go there ; rātri - dibā — night and day ; vetra - haste — with a cane in the hands ; sevāya rahibā — should remain engaged in His service .

Madhya-lila 16.113

Source

দুই মহাপাত্র, — ‘হরিচন্দন’, ‘মর্দরাজ’ । তাঁরে আজ্ঞা দিল রাজা — ‘করিহ সর্ব কায ॥ ১১৩ ॥

dui mahā-pātra, — ‘haricandana’, ‘mardarāja’ tāṅre ājñā dila rājā — ‘kariha sarva kāya

English translation

Translation

The King ordered two respectable officers named Haricandana and Mardarāja to do whatever was necessary to carry out these orders.

Word meanings

dui mahā - pātra — two respectable officers ; haricandana — Haricandana ; mardarāja — Mardarāja ; tāṅre — to them ; ājñā dila — gave orders ; rājā — the King ; kariha — do ; sarva kāya — everything needed .

Madhya-lila 16.114-115

Source

এক নব্য-নৌকা আনি’ রাখহ নদী-তীরে । যাহাঁ স্নান করি’ প্রভু যা’ন নদী-পারে ॥ ১১৪ ॥ তাহাঁ স্তম্ভ রোপণ কর ‘মহাতীর্থ’ করি’ । নিত্য স্নান করিব তাঁহা, তাহাঁ যেন মরি ॥ ১১৫ ॥

eka navya-naukā āni’ rākhaha nadī-tīre yāhāṅ snāna kari’ prabhu yā’na nadī-pāre tāhāṅ stambha ropaṇa kara ‘mahā-tīrtha’ kari’ nitya snāna kariba tāhāṅ, tāhāṅ yena mari

English translation

Translation

The King also ordered them to maintain a new boat on the banks of the river, and wherever Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu took His bath or crossed to the other side of the river, they should establish a memorial column and make that place a great place of pilgrimage. “Indeed,” said the King, “I will take my bath there. And let me also die there.”

Word meanings

eka — one ; navya — new ; naukā — boat ; āni’ — bringing ; rākhaha — keep ; nadī - tīre — on the bank of the river ; yāhāṅ — where ; snāna kari’ — taking a bath ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yā’na — goes ; nadī - pāre — on the other bank of the river ; tāhāṅ — there ; stambha — a memorial column ; ropaṇa kara — establish ; mahā - tīrtha kari’ — making that place a great place of pilgrimage ; nitya — daily ; snāna kariba — I shall bathe ; tāhāṅ — there ; tāhāṅ — there ; yena mari — let me die .

Madhya-lila 16.116

Source

চতুর্দ্বারে করহ উত্তম নব্য বাস । রামানন্দ, যাহ তুমি মহাপ্রভু-পাশ ॥ ১১৬ ॥

caturdvāre karaha uttama navya vāsa rāmānanda, yāha tumi mahāprabhu-pāśa

English translation

Translation

The King continued, “At Caturdvāra, please construct new residential quarters. Now, Rāmānanda, you can return to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.”

Word meanings

caturdvāre — at the place named Caturdvāra ; karaha — make ; uttama — very nice ; navya vāsa — new residential quarters ; rāmānanda — Rāmānanda Rāya ; yāha tumi — you please go ; mahāprabhu - pāśa — near Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Madhya-lila 16.117

Source

সন্ধ্যাতে চলিবে প্রভু, — নৃপতি শুনিল । হস্তী-উপর তাম্বুগৃহে স্ত্রীগণে চড়াইল ॥ ১১৭ ॥

sandhyāte calibe prabhu, — nṛpati śunila hastī-upara tāmbu-gṛhe strī-gaṇe caḍāila

English translation

Translation

When the King heard that the Lord was leaving that evening, he immediately made arrangements for some elephants with small tents on their backs to be brought there. Then all the ladies of the palace got on the elephants.

Word meanings

sandhyāte — in the evening ; calibe prabhu — the Lord will start ; nṛpati śunila — the King heard ; hastī - upara — upon the backs of elephants ; tāmbu - gṛhe — in tents ; strī - gaṇe — all the ladies ; caḍāila — made get up .

Madhya-lila 16.118

Source

প্রভুর চলিবার পথে রহে সারি হঞা । সন্ধ্যাতে চলিলা প্রভু নিজগণ লঞা ॥ ১১৮ ॥

prabhura calibāra pathe rahe sāri hañā sandhyāte calilā prabhu nija-gaṇa lañā

English translation

Translation

All these ladies went to the road the Lord was taking and remained there in a line. That evening, the Lord departed with His devotees.

Word meanings

prabhura — of the Lord ; calibāra pathe — on the route of walking ; rahe — remained ; sāri hañā — being in a line ; sandhyāte — in the evening ; calilā prabhu — the Lord departed ; nija - gaṇa lañā — taking His own men .

Madhya-lila 16.119

Source

‘চিত্রোৎপলা-নদী’ আসি’ ঘাটে কৈল স্নান । মহিষীসকল দেখি’ করয়ে প্রণাম ॥ ১১৯ ॥

‘citrotpalā-nadī’ āsi’ ghāṭe kaila snāna mahiṣī-sakala dekhi’ karaye praṇāma

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu went to the bank of the river Citrotpalā to take His bath, all the queens and ladies of the palace offered their obeisances to Him.

Word meanings

citrotpalā - nadī — to the river named Citrotpalā ; āsi’ — coming ; ghāṭe — on the bank ; kaila snāna — took a bath ; mahiṣī - sakala — all the queens and ladies of the palace ; dekhi’ — seeing ; karaye praṇāma — offered their obeisances .

Madhya-lila 16.120

Source

প্রভুর দরশনে সবে হৈল প্রেমময় । ‘কৃষ্ণ’ ‘কৃষ্ণ’ কহে, নেত্র অশ্রু বরিষয় ॥ ১২০ ॥

prabhura daraśane sabe haila premamaya ‘kṛṣṇa’ ‘kṛṣṇa’ kahe, netra aśru variṣaya

English translation

Translation

Upon seeing the Lord, they all felt themselves overwhelmed with love of Godhead, and, tears pouring from their eyes, they began to chant the holy name, “Kṛṣṇa! Kṛṣṇa!”

Word meanings

prabhura daraśane — by seeing the Lord ; sabe — all of them ; haila — became ; prema - maya — overwhelmed with love ; kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa kahe — chanted the holy name of Kṛṣṇa ; netra — the eyes ; aśru — tears ; variṣaya — poured .

Madhya-lila 16.121

Source

এমন কৃপালু নাহি শুনি ত্রিভুবনে । কৃষ্ণপ্রেমা হয় যাঁর দূর দরশনে ॥ ১২১ ॥

emana kṛpālu nāhi śuni tribhuvane kṛṣṇa-premā haya yāṅra dūra daraśane

English translation

Translation

There is no one as merciful as Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu within all three worlds. Simply by seeing Him from a distance, one is overwhelmed with love of Godhead.

Word meanings

emana kṛpālu — such a merciful person ; nāhi — not ; śuni — we hear ; tri - bhuvane — within the three worlds ; kṛṣṇa - premā haya — one gets love of Kṛṣṇa ; yāṅra — of whom ; dūra daraśane — by seeing from a distance .

Madhya-lila 16.122

Source

নৌকাতে চড়িয়া প্রভু হৈল নদী পার । জ্যোৎস্নাবতী রাত্র্যে চলি’ আইলা চতুর্দ্বার ॥ ১২২ ॥

naukāte caḍiyā prabhu haila nadī pāra jyotsnāvatī rātrye cali’ āilā caturdvāra

English translation

Translation

The Lord then got into a new boat and crossed the river. Walking in the full moonlight, He finally reached the town known as Caturdvāra.

Word meanings

naukāte caḍiyā — getting on the boat ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; haila — was ; nadī pāra — across the river ; jyotsnāvatī — lighted by the full moon ; rātrye — in the night ; cali’ — walking ; āilā — came ; caturdvāra — to Caturdvāra .

Madhya-lila 16.123

Source

রাত্র্যে তথা রহি’ প্রাতে স্নানকৃত্য কৈল । হেনকালে জগন্নাথের মহাপ্রসাদ আইল ॥ ১২৩ ॥

rātrye tathā rahi’ prāte snāna-kṛtya kaila hena-kāle jagannāthera mahā-prasāda āila

English translation

Translation

The Lord spent the night there and in the morning took His bath. At that time, remnants of Lord Jagannātha’s food arrived.

Word meanings

rātrye — on that night ; tathā rahi’ — staying there ; prāte — in the morning ; snāna - kṛtya kaila — took His bath ; hena - kāle — at that time ; jagannāthera — of Lord Jagannātha ; mahā - prasāda āila — remnants of food arrived .

Madhya-lila 16.124

Source

রাজার আজ্ঞায় পড়িছা পাঠায় দিনে-দিনে । বহুত প্রসাদ পাঠায় দিয়া বহু-জনে ॥ ১২৪ ॥

rājāra ājñāya paḍichā pāṭhāya dine-dine bahuta prasāda pāṭhāya diyā bahu-jane

English translation

Translation

Following the King’s orders, the superintendent of the temple sent large quantities of prasādam every day, and it was carried by many persons.

Word meanings

rājāra ājñāya — by the order of the King ; paḍichā — the superintendent of the temple ; pāṭhāya — sent ; dine - dine — day after day ; bahuta prasāda — a large quantity of food ; pāṭhāya — he sent ; diyā bahu - jane — carried by many persons .

Madhya-lila 16.125

Source

স্বগণ-সহিতে প্রভু প্রসাদ অঙ্গীকরি’ । উঠিয়া চলিলা প্রভু বলি’ ‘হরি’ ‘হরি’ ॥ ১২৫ ॥

svagaṇa-sahite prabhu prasāda aṅgīkari’ uṭhiyā calilā prabhu bali’ ‘hari’ ‘hari’

English translation

Translation

After accepting the prasādam, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu stood up and started to go, chanting the holy names, “Hari! Hari!”

Word meanings

sva - gaṇa - sahite — with His personal associates ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; prasāda — the remnants of food ; aṅgīkari’ — accepting ; uṭhiyā — standing up ; calilā — started ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bali’ — uttering ; hari hari — Hari, Hari .

Madhya-lila 16.126

Source

রামানন্দ, মর্দরাজ, শ্রীহরিচন্দন । সঙ্গে সেবা করি’ চলে এই তিন জন ॥ ১২৬ ॥

rāmānanda, mardarāja, śrī-haricandana saṅge sevā kari’ cale ei tina jana

English translation

Translation

Rāmānanda Rāya, Mardarāja and Śrī Haricandana always went with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and rendered various services.

Word meanings

rāmānanda — Rāmānanda ; mardarāja — Mardarāja ; śrī - haricandana — Śrī Haricandana ; saṅge — in company ; sevā kari’ — rendering service ; cale — went ; ei tina jana — these three gentlemen .

Madhya-lila 16.127-129

Source

প্রভু-সঙ্গে পুরী-গোসাঞি, স্বরূপ-দামোদর । জগদানন্দ, মুকুন্দ, গোবিন্দ, কাশীশ্বর ॥ ১২৭ ॥ হরিদাস-ঠাকুর আর পণ্ডিত-বক্রেশ্বর । গোপীনাথাচার্য, আর পণ্ডিত-দামোদর ॥ ১২৮ ॥ রামাই, নন্দাই, আর বহু ভক্তগণ । প্রধান কহিলুঁ, সবার কে করে গণন ॥ ১২৯ ॥

prabhu-saṅge purī-gosāñi, svarūpa-dāmodara jagadānanda, mukunda, govinda, kāśīśvara haridāsa-ṭhākura, āra paṇḍita-vakreśvara gopīnāthācārya, āra paṇḍita-dāmodara rāmāi, nandāi, āra bahu bhakta-gaṇa pradhāna kahiluṅ, sabāra ke kare gaṇana

English translation

Translation

Paramānanda Purī Gosvāmī, Svarūpa Dāmodara, Jagadānanda, Mukunda, Govinda, Kāśīśvara, Haridāsa Ṭhākura, Vakreśvara Paṇḍita, Gopīnātha Ācārya, Dāmodara Paṇḍita, Rāmāi, Nandāi and many other devotees accompanied the Lord. I have mentioned only the chief devotees. No one can describe the total number.

Word meanings

prabhu - saṅge — with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; purī - gosāñi — Paramānanda Purī ; svarūpa - dāmodara — Svarūpa Dāmodara ; jagadānanda — Jagadānanda ; mukunda — Mukunda ; govinda — Govinda ; kāśīśvara — Kāśīśvara ; haridāsa - ṭhākura — Haridāsa Ṭhākura ; āra — and ; paṇḍita - vakreśvara — Paṇḍita Vakreśvara ; gopīnātha - ācārya — Gopīnātha Ācārya ; āra — and ; paṇḍita - dāmodara — Paṇḍita Dāmodara ; rāmāi — Rāmāi ; nandāi — Nandāi ; āra — and ; bahu bhakta - gaṇa — many devotees ; pradhāna — the chief ; kahiluṅ — I have mentioned ; sabāra — of all of them ; ke — who ; kare gaṇana — can make an account .

Madhya-lila 16.130

Source

গদাধর-পণ্ডিত যবে সঙ্গেতে চলিলা । ‘ক্ষেত্র-সন্ন্যাস না ছাড়িহ’ — প্রভু নিষেধিলা ॥ ১৩০ ॥

gadādhara-paṇḍita yabe saṅgete calilā ‘kṣetra-sannyāsa nā chāḍiha’ — prabhu niṣedhilā

English translation

Translation

When Gadādhara Paṇḍita started to go with the Lord, he was forbidden to come and was asked not to give up the vow of kṣetra-sannyāsa.

Word meanings

gadādhara - paṇḍita — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; yabe — when ; saṅgete — with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; calilā — started to go ; kṣetra - sannyāsa — the renounced order of life at a holy place of pilgrimage ; nā chāḍiha — do not give up ; prabhu niṣedhilā — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu forbade .

Purport

When one takes kṣetra-sannyāsa, he leaves his household life and goes to a place of pilgrimage devoted to Lord Viṣṇu. Such places include Puruṣottama (Jagannātha Purī), Navadvīpa-dhāma and Mathurā-dhāma. The kṣetra-sannyāsī lives in these places alone or with his family. Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura considers kṣetra-sannyāsa to be the preferable vānaprastha situation in this Age of Kali. Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya lived in this way, and he has been called a kṣetra-sannyāsī — that is, a sannyāsī living in Jagannātha Purī.

Madhya-lila 16.131

Source

পণ্ডিত কহে, — “যাহাঁ তুমি, সেই নীলাচল । ক্ষেত্রসন্ন্যাস মোর যাউক রসাতল ॥” ১৩১ ॥

paṇḍita kahe, — “yāhāṅ tumi, sei nīlācala kṣetra-sannyāsa mora yāuka rasātala”

English translation

Translation

When he was requested to return to Jagannātha Purī, Gadādhara Paṇḍita told the Lord, “Wherever You are staying is Jagannātha Purī. Let my so-called kṣetra-sannyāsa go to hell.”

Word meanings

paṇḍita kahe — Gadādhara Paṇḍita said ; yāhāṅ — wherever ; tumi — You are situated ; sei — that ; nīlācala — Jagannātha Purī ; kṣetra - sannyāsa — vow to remain in a holy place of pilgrimage ; mora — my ; yāuka — let it go ; rasātala — to hell .

Madhya-lila 16.132

Source

প্রভু কহে, — “ইঁহা কর গোপীনাথ সেবন” । পণ্ডিত কহে, — “কোটি-সেবা ত্বৎপাদ-দর্শন ॥” ১৩২ ॥

prabhu kahe, — “iṅhā kara gopīnātha sevana” paṇḍita kahe, — “koṭi-sevā tvat-pāda-darśana”

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu asked Gadādhara Paṇḍita to remain at Jagannātha Purī and engage in Gopīnātha’s service, Gadādhara Paṇḍita replied, “One renders service to Gopīnātha a million times simply by seeing Your lotus feet.”

Word meanings

prabhu kahe — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said ; iṅhā — here ; kara — just do ; gopīnātha sevana — worship of Gopīnātha ; paṇḍita kahe — the paṇḍita said ; koṭi - sevā — millions of times the service ; tvat - pāda - darśana — seeing Your lotus feet .

Madhya-lila 16.133

Source

প্রভু কহে, — “সেবা ছাড়িবে, আমায় লাগে দোষ । ইঁহা রহি’ সেবা কর, — আমার সন্তোষ ॥” ১৩৩ ॥

prabhu kahe, — “sevā chāḍibe, āmāya lāge doṣa iṅhā rahi’ sevā kara, — āmāra santoṣa”

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu then said, “If you abandon His service, it will be My fault. It is better that you remain here and render service. That will be My satisfaction.”

Word meanings

prabhu kahe — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said ; sevā chāḍibe — you will give up the service ; āmāya — to Me ; lāge — will attach ; doṣa — fault ; iṅhā rahi’ — staying here ; sevā kara — just be engaged in service ; āmāra — My ; santoṣa — satisfaction .

Madhya-lila 16.134

Source

পণ্ডিত কহে, — “সব দোষ আমার উপর । তোমা-সঙ্গে না যাইব, যাইব একেশ্বর ॥ ১৩৪ ॥

paṇḍita kahe, — “saba doṣa āmāra upara tomā-saṅge nā yāiba, yāiba ekeśvara

English translation

Translation

The Paṇḍita replied, “Do not worry. All the faults will be on my head. I shall not accompany You but shall go alone.

Word meanings

paṇḍita kahe — the Paṇḍita said ; saba — all ; doṣa — fault ; āmāra upara — upon me ; tomā - saṅge — with You ; nā yāiba — I shall not go ; yāiba — I shall go ; ekeśvara — alone .

Madhya-lila 16.135

Source

আই’কে দেখিতে যাইব, না যাইব তোমা লাগি’ । ‘প্রতিজ্ঞা’-‘সেবা’-ত্যাগ-দোষ, তার আমি ভাগী ॥” ১৩৫ ॥

āi’ke dekhite yāiba, nā yāiba tomā lāgi’ ‘pratijñā’-‘sevā’-tyāga-doṣa, tāra āmi bhāgī”

English translation

Translation

“I shall go to see Śacīmātā, but I shall not go for Your sake. I shall be responsible for the abandoning of my vow and service to Gopīnātha.”

Word meanings

āi’ke — mother Śacīdevī ; dekhite — to see ; yāiba — I shall go ; nā yāiba — I shall not go ; tomā lāgi’ — for Your sake ; pratijñā - sevā — the vow and service to Gopīnātha ; tyāga - doṣa — the fault of giving up ; tāra — for that ; āmi bhāgī — I am responsible .

Madhya-lila 16.136

Source

এত বলি’ পণ্ডিত-গোসাঞি পৃথক্ চলিলা । কটক আসি’ প্রভু তাঁরে সঙ্গে আনাইলা ॥ ১৩৬ ॥

eta bali’ paṇḍita-gosāñi pṛthak calilā kaṭaka āsi’ prabhu tāṅre saṅge ānāilā

English translation

Translation

Thus Gadādhara Paṇḍita Gosvāmī traveled alone, but when they all arrived at Kaṭaka, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu called him, and he went into the Lord’s company.

Word meanings

eta bali’ — saying this ; paṇḍita - gosāñi — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; pṛthak calilā — proceeded separately ; kaṭaka āsi’ — when He came to Kaṭaka ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — him ; saṅge — with Him ; ānāilā — brought .

Madhya-lila 16.137

Source

পণ্ডিতের গৌরাঙ্গ-প্রেম বুঝন না যায় । ‘প্রতিজ্ঞা’, ‘শ্রীকৃষ্ণ-সেবা’ ছাড়িল তৃণপ্রায় ॥ ১৩৭ ॥

paṇḍitera gaurāṅga-prema bujhana nā yāya ‘pratijñā’, ‘śrī-kṛṣṇa-sevā’ chāḍila tṛṇa-prāya

English translation

Translation

No one can understand the loving intimacy between Gadādhara Paṇḍita and Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Gadādhara Paṇḍita gave up his vow and service to Gopīnātha just as one gives up a piece of straw.

Word meanings

paṇḍitera — of Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; gaurāṅga - prema — the love for Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bujhana — understanding ; nā yāya — is not possible ; pratijñā — a vow ; śrī - kṛṣṇa - sevā — the service of the Lord ; chāḍila — gave up ; tṛṇa - prāya — almost like straw .

Purport

Just to get Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s association, Gadādhara Paṇḍita gave up his life’s vow to engage in Gopīnātha’s service. This kind of loving affection can be understood only by very confidential devotees. Ordinarily, no one can understand its purport.

Madhya-lila 16.138

Source

তাঁহার চরিত্রে প্রভু অন্তরে সন্তোষ । তাঁহার হাতে ধরি’ কহে করি’ প্রণয়-রোষ ॥ ১৩৮ ॥

tāṅhāra caritre prabhu antare santoṣa tāṅhāra hāte dhari’ kahe kari’ praṇaya-roṣa

English translation

Translation

Gadādhara Paṇḍita’s behavior was very pleasing to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s heart. Nevertheless, the Lord took his hand and spoke to him, displaying the anger of love.

Word meanings

tāṅhāra caritre — in his behavior ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; antare — within His heart ; santoṣa — very much satisfied ; tāṅhāra hāte dhari’ — catching his hand ; kahe — says ; kari’ — exhibiting ; praṇaya - roṣa — anger in love .

Madhya-lila 16.139

Source

‘প্রতিজ্ঞা’, ‘সেবা’ ছাড়িবে, — এ তোমার ‘উদ্দেশ’ । সে সিদ্ধ হইল — ছাড়ি’ আইলা দূর দেশ ॥ ১৩৯ ॥

‘pratijñā’, ‘sevā’ chāḍibe, — e tomāra ‘uddeśa’ se siddha ha-ila — chāḍi’ āilā dūra deśa

English translation

Translation

“You have abandoned Gopīnātha’s service and broken your vow to live in Purī. All that is now complete because you have come so far.

Word meanings

pratijñā — the vow ; sevā — and service ; chāḍibe — will give up ; e — this ; tomāra — your ; uddeśa — purpose ; se — that ; siddha — complete ; ha - ila — has become ; chāḍi’ — giving up ; āilā — have come ; dūra deśa — to a distant place .

Madhya-lila 16.140

Source

আমার সঙ্গে রহিতে চাহ, — বাঞ্ছ নিজ-সুখ । তোমার দুই ধর্ম যায়, — আমার হয় ‘দুঃখ’ ॥ ১৪০ ॥

āmāra saṅge rahite cāha, — vāñcha nija-sukha tomāra dui dharma yāya, — āmāra haya ‘duḥkha’

English translation

Translation

“Your wanting to go with Me is simply a desire for sense gratification. In this way, you are breaking two religious principles, and because of this I am very unhappy.

Word meanings

āmāra saṅge — with Me ; rahite — to remain ; cāha — you want ; vāñcha — you desire ; nija - sukha — your own sense gratification ; tomāra — your ; dui dharma — two principles ; yāya — go away ; āmāra — of Me ; haya — there is ; duḥkha — unhappiness .

Madhya-lila 16.141

Source

মোর সুখ চাহ যদি, নীলাচলে চল । আমার শপথ, যদি আর কিছু বল ॥ ১৪১ ॥

mora sukha cāha yadi, nīlācale cala āmāra śapatha, yadi āra kichu bala

English translation

Translation

“If you want My happiness, please return to Nīlācala. You will simply condemn Me if you say any more about this matter.”

Word meanings

mora — of Me ; sukha — the satisfaction ; cāha — you want ; yadi — if ; nīlācale cala — go back to Jagannātha Purī (Nīlācala) ; āmāra śapatha — My condemnation ; yadi — if ; āra — more ; kichu — something ; bala — you say .

Madhya-lila 16.142

Source

এত বলি’ মহাপ্রভু নৌকাতে চড়িলা । মূর্চ্ছিত হঞা পণ্ডিত তথাই পড়িলা ॥ ১৪২ ॥

eta bali’ mahāprabhu naukāte caḍilā mūrcchita hañā paṇḍita tathāi paḍilā

English translation

Translation

Saying this, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu got into a boat, and Gadādhara Paṇḍita immediately fell down unconscious.

Word meanings

eta bali’ — saying this ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; naukāte caḍilā — got on a boat ; mūrcchita hañā — fainting ; paṇḍita — Gadādhara Paṇḍita Gosvāmī ; tathāi — there ; paḍilā — fell down .

Madhya-lila 16.143

Source

পণ্ডিতে লঞা যাইতে সার্বভৌমে আজ্ঞা দিলা । ভট্টাচার্য কহে, — “উঠ, ঐছে প্রভুর লীলা ॥ ১৪৩ ॥

paṇḍite lañā yāite sārvabhaume ājñā dilā bhaṭṭācārya kahe, — “uṭha, aiche prabhura līlā

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ordered Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya to take Gadādhara Paṇḍita with him. The Bhaṭṭācārya told Gadādhara Paṇḍita, “Get up! Such are the pastimes of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

paṇḍite lañā — taking the Paṇḍita ; yāite — to go ; sārvabhaume — unto Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya ; ājñā dilā — gave an order ; bhaṭṭācārya kahe — Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya said ; uṭha — please get up ; aiche — such ; prabhura līlā — the way of the Lord’s pastimes .

Madhya-lila 16.144

Source

তুমি জান, কৃষ্ণ নিজ-প্রতিজ্ঞা ছাড়িলা । ভক্ত কৃপা-বশে ভীষ্মের প্রতিজ্ঞা রাখিলা ॥ ১৪৪ ॥

tumi jāna, kṛṣṇa nija-pratijñā chāḍilā bhakta kṛpā-vaśe bhīṣmera pratijñā rākhilā

English translation

Translation

“You should know that Lord Kṛṣṇa Himself violated His own promise just to keep the promise of Grandfather Bhīṣma.

Word meanings

tumi jāna — you know ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; nija - pratijñā — His own promise ; chāḍilā — gave up ; bhakta kṛpā - vaśe — being obliged by the devotional service of a devotee ; bhīṣmera — of Grandfather Bhīṣma ; pratijñā rākhilā — kept the promise .

Madhya-lila 16.145

Source

স্বনিগমমপহায় মৎপ্রতিজ্ঞা- মৃতমধিকর্তুমবপ্লুতো রথস্থঃ । ধৃতরথচরণোঽভ্যয়াচ্চলদ্গু- র্হরিরিব হন্তুমিভং গতোত্তরীয়ঃ ॥ ১৪৫ ॥

sva-nigamam apahāya mat-pratijñām ṛtam adhikartum avapluto ratha-sthaḥ dhṛta-ratha-caraṇo ’bhyayāc calad-gur harir iva hantum ibhaṁ gatottarīyaḥ

English translation

Translation

“ ‘Intending to make my promise true, Lord Kṛṣṇa broke His own promise not to take up a weapon at Kurukṣetra. With His outer garment falling off, Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa jumped from His chariot, picked up a wheel and came running at me to kill me. Indeed, He rushed at me like a lion going to kill an elephant, and He caused the whole earth to tremble.’

Word meanings

sva - nigamam — His own promise not to take a weapon and fight on behalf of the Pāṇḍavas ; apahāya — giving up ; mat - pratijñām — my promise ; ṛtam — true ; adhikartum — to make more ; avaplutaḥ — having jumped down ; ratha - sthaḥ — who was on the chariot (Lord Kṛṣṇa) ; dhṛta — who took up ; ratha - caraṇaḥ — the wheel of the chariot ; abhyayāt — ran forward ; calat - guḥ — making the entire planet tremble ; hariḥ — a lion ; iva — like ; hantum — to kill ; ibham — an elephant ; gata - uttarīyaḥ — losing the outer garment .

Purport

Lord Kṛṣṇa promised not to fight in the Battle of Kurukṣetra or even take up a weapon. But when Bhīṣma wanted to keep his own promise to break the promise of the Lord, the Lord immediately got down from the chariot, and to make Bhīṣma’s promise true He picked up a chariot wheel and rushed forward to kill him. This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.9.37) .

Madhya-lila 16.146

Source

এইমত প্রভু তোমার বিচ্ছেদ সহিয়া । তোমার প্রতিজ্ঞা রক্ষা কৈল যত্ন করিয়া ॥” ১৪৬ ॥

ei-mata prabhu tomāra viccheda sahiyā tomāra pratijñā rakṣā kaila yatna kariyā”

English translation

Translation

“Similarly, tolerating separation from you, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu has protected your vow with great endeavor.”

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tomāra — of you ; viccheda sahiyā — tolerating the separation ; tomāra pratijñā — your vow ; rakṣā kaila — protected ; yatna kariyā — with great endeavor .

Madhya-lila 16.147

Source

এইমত কহি’ তাঁরে প্রবোধ করিলা । দুইজনে শোকাকুল নীলাচলে আইলা ॥ ১৪৭ ॥

ei-mata kahi’ tāṅre prabodha karilā dui-jane śokākula nīlācale āilā

English translation

Translation

In this way Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya revived Gadādhara Paṇḍita. Then both of them, very much grief-stricken, returned to Jagannātha Purī, Nīlācala.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; kahi’ — speaking ; tāṅre — him ; prabodha karilā — awoke ; dui - jane — the two persons ; śoka - ākula — overwhelmed with grief ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; āilā — went back .

Madhya-lila 16.148

Source

প্রভু লাগি’ ধর্ম-কর্ম ছাড়ে ভক্তগণ । ভক্ত-ধর্ম-হানি প্রভুর না হয় সহন ॥ ১৪৮ ॥

prabhu lāgi’ dharma-karma chāḍe bhakta-gaṇa bhakta-dharma-hāni prabhura nā haya sahana

English translation

Translation

All the devotees would abandon all kinds of duties for Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s sake, yet the Lord did not like the devotees’ giving up their promised duties.

Word meanings

prabhu lāgi’ — for the sake of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; dharma - karma — all prescribed duties ; chāḍe — give up ; bhakta - gaṇa — all the devotees ; bhakta - dharma — of the duty of a devotee ; hāni — the abandonment ; prabhura — to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nā haya — is not ; sahana — tolerable .

Madhya-lila 16.149

Source

‘প্রেমের বিবর্ত’ ইহা শুনে যেই জন । অচিরে মিলিয়ে তাঁরে চৈতন্য-চরণ ॥ ১৪৯ ॥

‘premera vivarta’ ihā śune yei jana acire miliye tāṅre caitanya-caraṇa

English translation

Translation

All these are the misgivings of loving affairs. Whoever listens to these incidents gets the shelter of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s lotus feet very soon.

Word meanings

premera vivarta — the misgivings of loving affairs ; ihā — this ; śune — listens ; yei jana — any person who ; acire — very soon ; miliye — meet ; tāṅre — him ; caitanya - caraṇa — the shelter of the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Madhya-lila 16.150

Source

দুই রাজপাত্র যেই প্রভু-সঙ্গে যায় । ‘যাজপুর’ আসি’ প্রভু তারে দিলেন বিদায় ॥ ১৫০ ॥

dui rāja-pātra yei prabhu-saṅge yāya ‘yājapura’ āsi’ prabhu tāre dilena vidāya

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His party arrived at Yājapura, the Lord asked the two government officers who had come with Him to return.

Word meanings

dui rāja - pātra — the two government officers ; yei — who ; prabhu - saṅge — with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yāya — go ; yājapura āsi’ — when coming to Yājapura ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāre — unto them ; dilena vidāya — bade farewell .

Purport

The place called Yājapura is very well known in Orissa. It is a subdivision of the Kaṭaka district and is situated on the southern side of the Vaitaraṇī River. Formerly great sages performed sacrifices on the northern bank of the Vaitaraṇī River; consequently the place is known as Yājapura, “the place where sacrifices are performed.” Some people say that this was one of the capital cities of King Yayāti and that from the name Yayāti-nagara the name Yājapura has come. As stated in the Mahābhārata ( Vana-parva, chapter 114):

ete kaliṅgāḥ kaunteya yatra vaitaraṇī nadī yatrāyajata dharmo ’pi devān śaraṇam etya vai atra vai ṛṣayo ’nye ca purā kratubhir ījire

According to the Mahābhārata, great sages formerly performed sacrifices in this place. There are still many temples of demigods and incarnations there, and there is also a Deity of Śrī Varāhadeva. This Deity is especially important and is visited by many pilgrims. Those who worship the Supreme Lord’s energy worship Vārāhī, Vaiṣṇavī and Indrāṇī, as well as many similar forms of Devī, the internal energy. There are many deities of Lord Śiva, and there are many places along the river known as Daśāśvamedha-ghāṭa. Sometimes Yājapura is also called Nābhi-gayā or Virajā-kṣetra.

Madhya-lila 16.151

Source

প্রভু বিদায় দিল, রায় যায় তাঁর সনে । কৃষ্ণকথা রামানন্দ-সনে রাত্রি-দিনে ॥ ১৫১ ॥

prabhu vidāya dila, rāya yāya tāṅra sane kṛṣṇa-kathā rāmānanda-sane rātri-dine

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu bade farewell to the officers, and Rāya Rāmānanda continued on with the Lord. The Lord talked to Rāmānanda Rāya about Śrī Kṛṣṇa day and night.

Word meanings

prabhu vidāya dila — the Lord bade them farewell ; rāya — Rāmānanda Rāya ; yāya — goes ; tāṅra sane — with Him ; kṛṣṇa - kathā — discussion of topics of Lord Kṛṣṇa ; rāmānanda - sane — with Rāmānanda ; rātri - dine — day and night .

Madhya-lila 16.152

Source

প্রতিগ্রামে রাজ-আজ্ঞায় রাজভৃত্যগণ । নব্য গৃহে নানা-দ্রব্যে করয়ে সেবন ॥ ১৫২ ॥

prati-grāme rāja-ājñāya rāja-bhṛtya-gaṇa navya gṛhe nānā-dravye karaye sevana

English translation

Translation

In each and every village, in compliance with the King’s order, government officers constructed new houses and filled each of them with stocks of grain. Thus they served the Lord.

Word meanings

prati - grāme — in each village ; rāja - ājñāya — by the order of the King ; rāja - bhṛtya - gaṇa — the government servants ; navya gṛhe — in newly constructed houses ; nānā - dravye — with all kinds of food grains ; karaye sevana — rendered service .

Madhya-lila 16.153

Source

এইমত চলি’ প্রভু ‘রেমুণা’ আইলা । তথা হৈতে রামানন্দ-রায়ে বিদায় দিলা ॥ ১৫৩ ॥

ei-mata cali’ prabhu ‘remuṇā’ āilā tathā haite rāmānanda-rāye vidāya dilā

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu finally arrived at Remuṇā, where He bade farewell to Śrī Rāmānanda Rāya.

Word meanings

ei - mata — in this way ; cali’ — walking ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; remuṇā āilā — came to Remuṇā ; tathā haite — from there ; rāmānanda - rāye — unto Rāmānanda Rāya ; vidāya dilā — bade farewell .

Purport

It was stated in the first chapter of Madhya-līlā, verse 149, that Rāmānanda Rāya was bade farewell from Bhadraka. Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura states that in those days the place called Remuṇā also included Bhadraka.

Madhya-lila 16.154

Source

ভূমেতে পড়িলা রায় নাহিক চেতন । রায়ে কোলে করি’ প্রভু করয়ে ক্রন্দন ॥ ১৫৪ ॥

bhūmete paḍilā rāya nāhika cetana rāye kole kari’ prabhu karaye krandana

English translation

Translation

When Rāmānanda Rāya fell to the ground and lost consciousness, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu took him upon His lap and began to cry.

Word meanings

bhūmete paḍilā — fell down on the ground ; rāya — Rāmānanda Rāya ; nāhika cetana — there was no consciousness ; rāye — Rāmānanda Rāya ; kole kari’ — taking on the lap ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; karaye krandana — began crying .

Madhya-lila 16.155

Source

রায়ের বিদায়-ভাব না যায় সহন । কহিতে না পারি এই তাহার বর্ণন ॥ ১৫৫ ॥

rāyera vidāya-bhāva nā yāya sahana kahite nā pāri ei tāhāra varṇana

English translation

Translation

Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s feelings of separation from Rāmānanda Rāya are very difficult to describe. Indeed, it is almost intolerable to do so, and therefore I cannot describe them further.

Word meanings

rāyera vidāya - bhāva — feelings of separation from Rāmānanda Rāya ; nā yāya — not possible ; sahana — to tolerate ; kahite — to speak ; nā pāri — I am not able ; ei — this ; tāhāra — of that ; varṇana — a description .

Madhya-lila 16.156

Source

তবে ‘ওঢ্র দেশ-সীমা’ প্রভু চলি’ আইলা । তথা রাজ-অধিকারী প্রভুরে মিলিলা ॥ ১৫৬ ॥

tabe ‘oḍhra-deśa-sīmā’ prabhu cali’ āilā tathā rāja-adhikārī prabhure mililā

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu finally arrived at the border of the state of Orissa, a government officer came there to meet Him.

Word meanings

tabe — thereafter ; oḍhra - deśa - sīmā — the boundary of Orissa ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; cali’ — traveling ; āilā — reached ; tathā — there ; rāja - adhikārī — a government officer ; prabhure — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mililā — met .

Madhya-lila 16.157

Source

দিন দুই-চারি তেঁহো করিল সেবন । আগে চলিবারে সেই কহে বিবরণ ॥ ১৫৭ ॥

dina dui-cāri teṅho karila sevana āge calibāre sei kahe vivaraṇa

English translation

Translation

For two or four days, the government officer served the Lord. He also gave the Lord detailed information of what was ahead.

Word meanings

dina dui - cāri — two or four days ; teṅho — he ; karila sevana — served the Lord ; āge — forward ; calibāre — for going ; sei — that officer ; kahe — spoke ; vivaraṇa — detailed information .

Madhya-lila 16.158

Source

মদ্যপ যবন — রাজার আগে অধিকার । তাঁর ভয়ে পথে কেহ নারে চলিবার ॥ ১৫৮ ॥

madyapa yavana-rājāra āge adhikāra tāṅra bhaye pathe keha nāre calibāra

English translation

Translation

He informed the Lord that the territory ahead was ruled by a Muslim governor who was a drunkard. Out of fear of this king, no one could walk the road freely.

Word meanings

madyapa — drunkard ; yavana — Muslim ; rājāra — of a king ; āge — ahead ; adhikāra — the government ; tāṅra bhaye — being afraid of such a king ; pathe — on the road ; keha — anyone ; nāre — not able ; calibāra — to travel .

Madhya-lila 16.159

Source

পিছলদা পর্যন্ত সব তাঁর অধিকার । তাঁর ভয়ে নদী কেহ হৈতে নারে পার ॥ ১৫৯ ॥

pichaladā paryanta saba tāṅra adhikāra tāṅra bhaye nadī keha haite nāre pāra

English translation

Translation

The jurisdiction of the Muslim government extended up to Pichaladā. Due to fear of the Muslims, no one would cross the river.

Word meanings

pichaladā — the place named Pichaladā ; paryanta — up to ; saba — everything ; tāṅra — of him ; adhikāra — under the authority ; tāṅra bhaye — because of fear of him ; nadī — the river ; keha — anyone ; haite — to cross ; nāre — not able ; pāra — to the other side .

Purport

During the old days, Pichaladā was part of Tamluk and Bengal. Pichaladā is located about fourteen miles south of Tamluk. The river Rūpa-nārāyaṇa is well known in Tamluk, and Pichaladā was situated on the bank of the Rūpa-nārāyaṇa River.

Madhya-lila 16.160

Source

দিন কত রহ, সন্ধি করি’ তাঁর সনে । তবে সুখে নৌকাতে করাইব গমনে ॥ ১৬০ ॥

dina kata raha — sandhi kari’ tāṅra sane tabe sukhe naukāte karāiba gamane

English translation

Translation

Mahārāja Pratāparudra’s government officer further informed Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu that He should stay at the Orissa border for some days so that a peaceful agreement could be negotiated with the Muslim governor. In that way, the Lord would be able to cross the river peacefully in a boat.

Word meanings

dina kata raha — stay here for a few days ; sandhi kari’ — making peaceful negotiations ; tāṅra sane — with him ; tabe — then ; sukhe — in happiness ; naukāte — on the boat ; karāiba gamane — I will help You start .

Madhya-lila 16.161

Source

সেই কালে সে যবনের এক অনুচর । ‘উড়িয়া-কটকে’ আইল করি’ বেশান্তর ॥ ১৬১ ॥

sei kāle se yavanera eka anucara ‘uḍiyā-kaṭake’ āila kari’ veśāntara

English translation

Translation

At that time, a follower of the Muslim governor arrived at the Orissa encampment dressed in disguise.

Word meanings

sei kāle — at that time ; se yavanera — of the Muslim governor ; eka anucara — one follower ; uḍiyā - kaṭake — to the camp of Orissan soldiers ; āila — came ; kari’ veśa - antara — changing the dress .

Madhya-lila 16.162-163

Source

প্রভুর সেই অদভুত চরিত্র দেখিয়া । হিন্দু-চর কহে সেই যবন-পাশ গিয়া ॥ ১৬২ ॥ ‘এক সন্ন্যাসী আইল জগন্নাথ হইতে । অনেক সিদ্ধ-পুরুষ হয় তাঁহার সহিতে ॥ ১৬৩ ॥

prabhura sei adabhuta caritra dekhiyā hindu-cara kahe sei yavana-pāśa giyā ‘eka sannyāsī āila jagannātha ha-ite aneka siddha-puruṣa haya tāṅhāra sahite

English translation

Translation

The Muslim spy saw the wonderful characteristics of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, and when he returned to the Muslim governor, he told him, “A mendicant has come from Jagannātha Purī with many liberated persons.

Word meanings

prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sei — that ; adabhuta caritra — wonderful characteristics ; dekhiyā — seeing ; hindu - cara — the Hindu spy ; kahe — says ; sei — that ; yavana - pāśa giyā — going to the Muslim King ; eka sannyāsī — one mendicant ; āila — has come ; jagannātha ha - ite — from Jagannātha Purī ; aneka — many ; siddha - puruṣa — liberated persons ; haya — are ; tāṅhāra sahite — with Him .

Madhya-lila 16.164

Source

নিরন্তর করে সবে কৃষ্ণ-সংকীর্তন । সবে হাসে, নাচে, গায়, করয়ে ক্রন্দন ॥ ১৬৪ ॥

nirantara kare sabe kṛṣṇa-saṅkīrtana sabe hāse, nāce, gāya, karaye krandana

English translation

Translation

“All these saintly people incessantly chant the Hare Kṛṣṇa mahā-mantra, and they all laugh, dance, chant and cry.

Word meanings

nirantara — without stopping ; kare — perform ; sabe — all ; kṛṣṇa - saṅkīrtana — chanting of the holy name of the Lord ; sabe — all of them ; hāse — laugh ; nāce — dance ; gāya — sing ; karaye krandana — and cry .

Madhya-lila 16.165

Source

লক্ষ লক্ষ লোক আইসে তাহা দেখিবারে । তাঁরে দেখি’ পুনরপি যাইতে নারে ঘরে ॥ ১৬৫ ॥

lakṣa lakṣa loka āise tāhā dekhibāre tāṅre dekhi’ punarapi yāite nāre ghare

English translation

Translation

“Many millions upon millions of people come to see Him, and after they see Him, they cannot return home.

Word meanings

lakṣa lakṣa — millions upon millions ; loka — people ; āise — come ; tāhā — that ; dekhibāre — to see ; tāṅre dekhi’ — after seeing Him ; punarapi — again ; yāite — to go ; nāre — are not able ; ghare — home .

Madhya-lila 16.166

Source

সেই সব লোক হয় বাউলের প্রায় । ‘কৃষ্ণ’ কহি’ নাচে, কান্দে, গড়াগড়ি যায় ॥ ১৬৬ ॥

sei saba loka haya bāulera prāya ‘kṛṣṇa’ kahi’ nāce, kānde, gaḍāgaḍi yāya

English translation

Translation

“All these people become like madmen. They simply chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa and dance. Sometimes they even cry and roll on the ground.

Word meanings

sei saba loka — all those persons ; haya — are ; bāulera prāya — almost like madmen ; kṛṣṇa kahi’ — chanting the holy name of Kṛṣṇa ; nāce — they dance ; kānde — they cry ; gaḍāgaḍi yāya — they roll on the ground .

Madhya-lila 16.167

Source

কহিবার কথা নহে — দেখিলে সে জানি । তাঁহার প্রভাবে তাঁরে ‘ঈশ্বর’ করি’ মানি ॥’ ১৬৭ ॥

kahibāra kathā nahe — dekhile se jāni tāṅhāra prabhāve tāṅre ‘īśvara’ kari’ māni’

English translation

Translation

“Actually these things cannot even be described. One can understand them only by seeing. Considering His influence, I accept Him as the Supreme Personality of Godhead.”

Word meanings

kahibāra kathā — describable topic ; nahe — this is not ; dekhile — if one sees ; se jāni — he can understand ; tāṅhāra prabhāve — by His influence ; tāṅre — Him ; īśvara kari’ — as the Supreme Personality of Godhead ; māni — I accept .

Madhya-lila 16.168

Source

এত কহি’ সেই চর ‘হরি’ ‘কৃষ্ণ’ গায় । হাসে, কান্দে, নাচে, গায় বাউলের প্রায় ॥ ১৬৮ ॥

eta kahi’ sei cara ‘hari’ ‘kṛṣṇa’ gāya hāse, kānde, nāce, gāya bāulera prāya

English translation

Translation

After saying this, the messenger began to chant the holy names of Hari and Kṛṣṇa. He also began to laugh and cry, dance and sing exactly like a madman.

Word meanings

eta kahi’ — saying this ; sei cara — that messenger ; hari — Hari ; kṛṣṇa — Kṛṣṇa ; gāya — chants ; hāse — laughs ; kānde — cries ; nāce — dances ; gāya — sings ; bāulera prāya — just like a madman .

Madhya-lila 16.169

Source

এত শুনি’ যবনের মন ফিরি’ গেল । আপন-‘বিশ্বাস’ উড়িয়া স্থানে পাঠাইল ॥ ১৬৯ ॥

eta śuni’ yavanera mana phiri’ gela āpana-‘viśvāsa’ uḍiyā sthāne pāṭhāila

English translation

Translation

When the Muslim governor heard this, his mind changed. He then sent his secretary to the representative of the Orissan government.

Word meanings

eta śuni’ — after hearing this ; yavanera — of the Muslim governor ; mana — the mind ; phiri’ gela — became changed ; āpana — own ; viśvāsa — secretary ; uḍiyā — of the representative of the Orissan government ; sthāne — to the place ; pāṭhāila — sent .

Madhya-lila 16.170

Source

‘বিশ্বাস’ আসিয়া প্রভুর চরণ বন্দিল । ‘কৃষ্ণ’ ‘কৃষ্ণ’ কহি’ প্রেমে বিহ্বল হইল ॥ ১৭০ ॥

‘viśvāsa’ āsiyā prabhura caraṇa vandila ‘kṛṣṇa’ ‘kṛṣṇa’ kahi’ preme vihvala ha-ila

English translation

Translation

The Muslim secretary came to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. When he offered his respects to the Lord’s lotus feet and uttered the holy name of the Lord, “Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa,” he also was overwhelmed with ecstatic love.

Word meanings

viśvāsa — the secretary ; āsiyā — coming ; prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; caraṇa — the lotus feet ; vandila — worshiped ; kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa — the holy name of the Lord, “Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa” ; kahi’ — uttering ; preme — in ecstasy ; vihvala — overwhelmed ; ha - ila — became .

Madhya-lila 16.171

Source

ধৈর্য হঞা উড়িয়াকে কহে নমস্করি’ । ‘তোমা-স্থানে পাঠাইলা ম্লেচ্ছ অধিকারী ॥ ১৭১ ॥

dhairya hañā uḍiyāke kahe namaskari’ ‘tomā-sthāne pāṭhāilā mleccha adhikārī

English translation

Translation

After calming down, the Muslim secretary offered his respects and informed the representative of the Orissan government, “The Muslim governor has sent me here.

Word meanings

dhairya hañā — becoming calm ; uḍiyāke — to the representative of the Orissan government ; kahe — says ; namaskari’ — offering respect ; tomā - sthāne — to your place ; pāṭhāilā — has sent ; mleccha — the Muslim ; adhikārī — governor .

Madhya-lila 16.172

Source

তুমি যদি আজ্ঞা দেহ’ এথাকে আসিয়া । যবন অধিকারী যায় প্রভুকে মিলিয়া ॥ ১৭২ ॥

tumi yadi ājñā deha’ ethāke āsiyā yavana adhikārī yāya prabhuke miliyā

English translation

Translation

“If you agree, the Muslim governor will come here to meet Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and then return.

Word meanings

tumi — you ; yadi — if ; ājñā — order ; deha’ — give ; ethāke — here ; āsiyā — coming ; yavana adhikārī — the Muslim governor ; yāya — may go ; prabhuke — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; miliyā — after meeting .

Madhya-lila 16.173

Source

বহুত উৎকণ্ঠা তাঁর, কর্যাছে বিনয় । তোমা-সনে এই সন্ধি, নাহি যুদ্ধ-ভয় ॥’ ১৭৩ ॥

bahuta utkaṇṭhā tāṅra, karyāche vinaya tomā-sane ei sandhi, nāhi yuddha-bhaya’

English translation

Translation

“The Muslim governor is very eager, and he has submitted this petition with great respect. It is a proposal for peace. You need not fear that we will fight.”

Word meanings

bahuta — very much ; utkaṇṭhā — anxiety ; tāṅra — his ; karyāche — has made ; vinaya — submissive petition ; tomā - sane — with you ; ei — this ; sandhi — a peace proposal ; nāhi — there is not ; yuddha - bhaya — fear of fighting .

Madhya-lila 16.174

Source

শুনি’ মহাপাত্র কহে হঞা বিস্ময় । ‘মদ্যপ যবনের চিত্ত ঐছে কে করয় ! ১৭৪ ॥

śuni’ mahā-pātra kahe hañā vismaya ‘madyapa yavanera citta aiche ke karaya!

English translation

Translation

Upon hearing this proposal, the representative of the Orissan government, the mahā-pātra, was very much astonished. He thought, “The Muslim governor is a drunkard. Who has changed his mind?

Word meanings

śuni’ — hearing ; mahā - pātra — the representative of the Orissan government ; kahe — says ; hañā vismaya — becoming astonished ; madyapa — drunkard ; yavanera — of the Muslim ; citta — the heart ; aiche — in this way ; ke karaya — who has made .

Madhya-lila 16.175

Source

আপনে মহাপ্রভু তাঁর মন ফিরাইল । দর্শন-স্মরণে যাঁর জগৎ তারিল ॥’ ১৭৫ ॥

āpane mahāprabhu tāṅra mana phirāila darśana-smaraṇe yāṅra jagat tārila’

English translation

Translation

“It must be Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu Himself who has changed the Muslim’s mind. Due to His presence and even due to His remembrance, the whole world is liberated.”

Word meanings

āpane — personally ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅra — his ; mana — mind ; phirāila — changed ; darśana — by a personal visit ; smaraṇe — by remembrance ; yāṅra — of whom ; jagat — the whole world ; tārila — He has delivered .

Purport

From this we can understand that since the Muslim governor was a drunkard ( madyapa ), ordinarily there would have been no chance that he would change. But Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu could turn anyone’s mind to Kṛṣṇa consciousness. One can be delivered from material existence simply by remembering Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s holy name or by visiting Him. This Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement is being spread throughout the world, but not even one yavana or mleccha addicted to drinking could have changed and accepted Kṛṣṇa consciousness without Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s grace. People are often astonished to see many thousands of Westerners converted to Vaiṣṇavism. Generally Westerners are addicted to meat-eating, drinking, gambling and illicit sex; therefore their taking up Kṛṣṇa consciousness is astonishing. In India, especially, there is much astonishment at this. The answer, however, is given here: darśana-smaraṇe yāṅra jagat tārila. This change is made possible simply by the remembrance of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. The Western devotees are very sincerely chanting the holy names of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His associates: śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya prabhu-nityānanda śrī-advaita gadādhara śrīvāsādi-gaura-bhakta-vṛnda. By the mercy of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His associates, people are being purified and their consciousness directed from māyā to Kṛṣṇa.

The word viśvāsa refers to a secretary. This title is generally found among the kāyastha caste in the Hindu community. In Bengal, the title viśvāsa is still used by the kāyasthas. The word viśvāsa means “faithful,” and a viśvāsī is a person in whom one can place faith. Śrī Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura states that during the Muslim reign in Bengal, there was a secretariat entitled viśvāsa-khānā. The office of viśvāsa-khānā was a secretariat office in which only the most reliable people were employed. They were elected from the kāyastha community, a community that is still very expert in managing business and government affairs. The secretariat, or viśvāsa-khānā, is generally a very reliable and faithful servant. Whenever some confidential service was needed, these officers were employed.

Madhya-lila 16.176

Source

এত বলি’ বিশ্বাসেরে কহিল বচন । “ভাগ্য তাঁর — আসি’ করুক প্রভু দরশন ॥ ১৭৬ ॥

eta bali’ viśvāsere kahila vacana “bhāgya tāṅra — āsi’ karuka prabhu daraśana

English translation

Translation

After thinking this, the mahā-pātra immediately informed the Muslim secretary, “It is a great fortune for your governor. Let him come visit Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

eta bali’ — saying this ; viśvāsere — unto the secretary of the Muslim governor ; kahila vacana — spoke the following words ; bhāgya — great fortune ; tāṅra — his ; āsi’ — coming ; karuka — let him do ; prabhu daraśana — visiting Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Madhya-lila 16.177

Source

প্রতীত করিয়ে — যদি নিরস্ত্র হঞা । আসিবেক পাঁচ-সাত ভৃত্য সঙ্গে লঞা ॥” ১৭৭ ॥

pratīta kariye — yadi nirastra hañā āsibeka pāṅca-sāta bhṛtya saṅge lañā?”

English translation

Translation

“However, let me make it understood that he should come here without weapons. He may bring with him five or seven servants.”

Word meanings

pratīta — understood ; kariye — I make ; yadi — if ; nirastra hañā — being without weapons ; āsibeka — he will come ; pāṅca - sāta — five to seven ; bhṛtya — servants ; saṅge — in company ; lañā — taking .

Madhya-lila 16.178

Source

‘বিশ্বাস’ যাঞা তাঁহারে সকল কহিল । হিন্দুবেশ ধরি’ সেই যবন আইল ॥ ১৭৮ ॥

‘viśvāsa’ yāñā tāṅhāre sakala kahila hindu-veśa dhari’ sei yavana āila

English translation

Translation

The secretary returned to the Muslim governor and informed him of this news. Dressing himself like a Hindu, the Muslim governor then came to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

viśvāsa — the secretary ; yāñā — returning ; tāṅhāre — unto the Muslim governor ; sakala kahila — told everything ; hindu - veśa dhari’ — accepting the dress of a Hindu ; sei yavana — that Muslim governor ; āila — came .

Madhya-lila 16.179

Source

দূর হৈতে প্রভু দেখি’ ভূমেতে পড়িয়া । দণ্ডবৎ করে অশ্রু-পুলকিত হঞা ॥ ১৭৯ ॥

dūra haite prabhu dekhi’ bhūmete paḍiyā daṇḍavat kare aśru-pulakita hañā

English translation

Translation

Upon seeing Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu from a distant place, the Muslim governor fell to the ground and offered obeisances. Tears came to his eyes, and he was jubilant with ecstatic emotions.

Word meanings

dūra haite — from a distance ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; dekhi’ — seeing ; bhūmete paḍiyā — falling down on the ground ; daṇḍavat kare — offered obeisances ; aśru — tears ; pulakita — jubilant ; hañā — becoming .

Madhya-lila 16.180

Source

মহাপাত্র আনিল তাঁরে করিয়া সম্মান । যোড়হাতে প্রভু-আগে লয় কৃষ্ণনাম ॥ ১৮০ ॥

mahā-pātra ānila tāṅre kariyā sammāna yoḍa-hāte prabhu-āge laya kṛṣṇa-nāma

English translation

Translation

Arriving in that way, the Muslim governor was respectfully brought before Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu by the mahā-pātra. The governor then stood before the Lord with folded hands, and he chanted the holy name of Kṛṣṇa.

Word meanings

mahā - pātra — the Orissan representative ; ānila — brought ; tāṅre — him ; kariyā sammāna — showing great respect ; yoḍa - hāte — with folded hands ; prabhu - āge — before Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; laya kṛṣṇa - nāma — chanted the holy name of Kṛṣṇa .

Madhya-lila 16.181

Source

“অধম যবনকুলে কেন জন্ম হৈল । বিধি মোরে হিন্দুকুলে কেন না জন্মাইল ॥ ১৮১ ॥

“adhama yavana-kule kena janma haila vidhi more hindu-kule kena nā janmāila

English translation

Translation

The governor then submissively asked, “Why was I born in a Muslim family? This is considered a low birth. Why didn’t supreme Providence grant me a birth in a Hindu family?

Word meanings

adhama — low ; yavana - kule — in the family of a Muslim ; kena — why ; janma haila — there was birth ; vidhi — Providence ; more — me ; hindu - kule — in the family of a Hindu ; kena — why ; nā — not ; janmāila — caused to be born .

Madhya-lila 16.182

Source

‘হিন্দু’ হৈলে পাইতাম তোমার চরণ-সন্নিধান । ব্যর্থ মোর এই দেহ, যাউক পরাণ ॥” ১৮২ ॥

‘hindu’ haile pāitāma tomāra caraṇa-sannidhāna vyartha mora ei deha, yāuka parāṇa”

English translation

Translation

“If I had taken birth in a Hindu family, it would have been easy for me to remain near Your lotus feet. Since my body is now useless, let me die immediately.”

Word meanings

hindu haile — if I had been born in a Hindu family ; pāitāma — I would have gotten ; tomāra — of You ; caraṇa — of the lotus feet ; sannidhāna — proximity ; vyartha — useless ; mora — my ; ei — this ; deha — body ; yāuka parāṇa — let me die immediately .

Madhya-lila 16.183

Source

এত শুনি’ মহাপাত্র আবিষ্ট হঞা । প্ৰভুকে করেন স্তুতি চরণে ধরিয়া ॥ ১৮৩ ॥

eta śuni’ mahā-pātra āviṣṭa hañā prabhuke karena stuti caraṇe dhariyā

English translation

Translation

Upon hearing the governor’s submissive statement, the mahā-pātra was overwhelmed with joy. He clasped the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and began to offer the following prayers.

Word meanings

eta śuni’ — hearing this ; mahā - pātra — the representative of the Orissan government ; āviṣṭa hañā — being overwhelmed ; prabhuke — unto Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; karena — makes ; stuti — prayers ; caraṇe dhariyā — catching His feet .

Madhya-lila 16.184

Source

‘চণ্ডাল — পবিত্র যাঁর শ্রীনাম-শ্রবণে । হেন-তোমার এই জীব পাইল দরশনে ॥ ১৮৪ ॥

‘caṇḍāla — pavitra yāṅra śrī-nāma-śravaṇe hena-tomāra ei jīva pāila daraśane

English translation

Translation

“Simply by hearing Your holy name, a caṇḍāla, the lowest of men, can be purified. Now this conditioned soul has received Your personal interview.

Word meanings

caṇḍāla — the dog-eater, the lowest of mankind ; pavitra — purified ; yāṅra — of whom ; śrī - nāma - śravaṇe — by hearing the holy name ; hena - tomāra — of such a one as You ; ei jīva — this conditioned living entity ; pāila — has gotten ; daraśane — the personal visit .

Madhya-lila 16.185

Source

ইঁহার যে এই গতি, ইথে কি বিস্ময় ? তোমার দর্শন-প্ৰভাব এইমত হয় ॥’ ১৮৫ ॥

iṅhāra ye ei gati, ithe ki vismaya? tomāra darśana-prabhāva ei-mata haya’

English translation

Translation

“It is no wonder that this Muslim governor has attained such results. Simply by seeing You, all this is possible.

Word meanings

iṅhāra — of this Muslim governor ; ye — which ; ei — this ; gati — result ; ithe — in this ; ki — what ; vismaya — the wonder ; tomāra — of You ; darśana - prabhāva — influence of seeing ; ei - mata haya — is like this .

Madhya-lila 16.186

Source

যন্নামধেয়শ্রবণানুকীর্তনাদ্ যত্প্রহ্বণাদ্ যৎস্মরণাদপি ক্বচিৎ । শ্বাদোঽপি সদ্যঃ সবনায় কল্পতে কুতঃ পুনস্তে ভগবন্নু দর্শনাৎ ॥ ১৮৬ ॥

yan-nāmadheya-śravaṇānukīrtanād yat-prahvaṇād yat-smaraṇād api kvacit śvādo ’pi sadyaḥ savanāya kalpate kutaḥ punas te bhagavan nu darśanāt

English translation

Translation

“ ‘To say nothing of the spiritual advancement of persons who see the Supreme Person face to face, even a person born in a family of dog-eaters becomes immediately eligible to perform Vedic sacrifices if he once utters the holy name of the Supreme Personality of Godhead or chants about Him, hears about His pastimes, offers Him obeisances or even remembers Him.’ ”

Word meanings

yat — of whom ; nāmadheya — of the name ; śravaṇa — from hearing ; anukīrtanāt — and thereafter from chanting ; yat — to whom ; prahvaṇāt — from offering respects ; yat — of whom ; smaraṇāt — from simply remembering ; api — also ; kvacit — sometimes ; śva - adaḥ — a dog-eater ; api — even ; sadyaḥ — immediately ; savanāya — for performing Vedic sacrifices ; kalpate — becomes eligible ; kutaḥ — what to speak ; punaḥ — again ; te — of You ; bhagavan — O Supreme Personality of Godhead ; nu — certainly ; darśanāt — from seeing .

Purport

This is a quotation from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (3.33.6) . According to this verse, it does not matter what position a person holds. One may be the lowest of the low — a caṇḍāla, or dog-eater — but if he takes to chanting and hearing the holy name of the Lord, he is immediately eligible to perform Vedic sacrifices. This is especially true in this Age of Kali.

harer nāma harer nāma harer nāmaiva kevalam kalau nāsty eva nāsty eva nāsty eva gatir anyathā

( Bṛhan-nāradīya Purāṇa 38.126)

“In this age of quarrel and hypocrisy, the only means of deliverance is the chanting of the holy names of the Lord. There is no other way. There is no other way. There is no other way.” A person born in a brāhmaṇa family cannot perform Vedic sacrifices until he is properly purified and has attained his sacred thread. However, according to the present verse of Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta (quoted from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam ), it is understood that even a lowborn person can immediately perform sacrifices if he sincerely chants and hears the holy name of the Lord. Sometimes envious people ask how Europeans and Americans in this Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement can become brāhmaṇas and perform sacrifices. They do not know that the Europeans and Americans have already been purified by chanting the holy name of the Lord — Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare. This is the proof. Śvādo ’pi sadyaḥ savanāya kalpate. One may be born in a family of dog-eaters, but he can perform sacrifices simply by chanting the mahā-mantra.

Those who find fault in the Western Vaiṣṇavas should consider this statement from Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam and the commentary on this verse by Śrīla Jīva Gosvāmī. In this regard, Śrīla Jīva Gosvāmī has stated that to become a brāhmaṇa one has to wait for purification and undergo the sacred thread ceremony, but a chanter of the holy name does not have to wait for the sacred thread ceremony. We do not allow devotees to perform sacrifices until they are properly initiated in the sacred thread ceremony. Yet according to this verse, an offenseless chanter of the holy name is already fit to perform a fire ceremony, even though he is not doubly initiated by the sacred thread ceremony. This is the verdict given by Devahūti, the mother of Lord Kapiladeva, when He was instructing her in pure Sāṅkhya philosophy.

Madhya-lila 16.187

Source

তবে মহাপ্ৰভু তাঁরে কৃপা-দৃষ্টি করি’ । আশ্বাসিয়া কহে, — তুমি কহ ‘কৃষ্ণ’ ‘হরি’ ॥ ১৮৭ ॥

tabe mahāprabhu tāṅre kṛpā-dṛṣṭi kari’ āśvāsiyā kahe, — tumi kaha ‘kṛṣṇa’ ‘hari’

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu then glanced with mercy at the Muslim governor. Giving him assurance, He asked him to chant the holy names “Kṛṣṇa” and “Hari.”

Word meanings

tabe — thereafter ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — unto him ; kṛpā - dṛṣṭi kari’ — glancing with mercy ; āśvāsiyā — giving assurance ; kahe — says ; tumi — you ; kaha — utter ; kṛṣṇa — the holy name “Kṛṣṇa” ; hari — the holy name “Hari.” .

Purport

It is Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s mercy that He advises everyone — even caṇḍālas, mlecchas and yavanas — to chant the holy name of the Lord. In other words, one who has taken to chanting the holy names “Kṛṣṇa” and “Hari” has already received Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s mercy. The Lord’s request to chant the holy name of Kṛṣṇa is now extended to everyone in the world through the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement. Whoever follows Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s instructions will certainly be purified, and one who sincerely chants the holy name offenselessly is already more than a brāhmaṇa. Unfortunately there are many fools and rascals in India who do not allow Western Vaiṣṇavas to enter certain temples. Such rascals do not clearly understand the Vedas. As stated previously, yan-nāmadheya-śravaṇānukīrtanād . . . savanāya kalpate.

Madhya-lila 16.188

Source

সেই কহে, — ‘মোরে যদি কৈলা অঙ্গীকার । এক আজ্ঞা দেহ, — সেবা করি যে তোমার ॥ ১৮৮ ॥

sei kahe, — ‘more yadi kailā aṅgīkāra eka ājñā deha, — sevā kari ye tomāra

English translation

Translation

The Muslim governor then said, “Since You have so kindly accepted me, please give me some order so that I can render You some service.”

Word meanings

sei kahe — the Muslim governor said ; more — me ; yadi — if ; kailā aṅgīkāra — You have accepted ; eka ājñā — one order ; deha — give ; sevā — service ; kari — I may render ; ye — so that ; tomāra — Your .

Purport

If one is purified by following Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s orders — that is, by chanting the holy name of Kṛṣṇa — one must certainly be eager to render service to the Lord. This is the test. When one engages enthusiastically in the Lord’s service, it is to be understood that he is reaping the results of chanting the names of Kṛṣṇa and Hari.

Madhya-lila 16.189

Source

গো-ব্রাহ্মণ-বৈষ্ণবে হিংসা কর্যাছি অপার । সেই পাপ হইতে মোর হউক নিস্তার ॥ ১৮৯ ॥

go-brāhmaṇa-vaiṣṇave hiṁsā karyāchi apāra sei pāpa ha-ite mora ha-uka nistāra

English translation

Translation

The Muslim governor then prayed for liberation from the unlimited sinful reactions he had previously incurred by being envious of brāhmaṇas and Vaiṣṇavas and killing cows.

Word meanings

go - brāhmaṇa - vaiṣṇave — to the cows, brāhmaṇas and Vaiṣṇavas ; hiṁsā — violence and envy ; karyāchi — I have done ; apāra — unlimitedly ; sei pāpa ha - ite — from those sinful activities ; mora — my ; ha - uka — let there be ; nistāra — liberation .

Purport

By chanting the holy names Kṛṣṇa and Hari, one is certainly liberated from the reactions to such sinful activities as killing cows or insulting brāhmaṇas and Vaiṣṇavas. It is most sinful to kill cows and insult brāhmaṇas and Vaiṣṇavas. The karma incurred by such activity is very great, but one can immediately nullify all this karma by surrendering to Lord Kṛṣṇa and chanting His holy name. After being released from one’s sinful reactions ( karma ), one becomes eager to serve the Lord. This is the test. Since the Muslim governor was immediately purified in the presence of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, he could utter the names of Kṛṣṇa and Hari. Consequently he was eager to render some service, and the Lord, eager to fulfill his desires, immediately had the devotee Mukunda Datta inform the governor that there was some service to render.

Madhya-lila 16.190

Source

তবে মুকুন্দ দত্ত কহে, — ‘শুন, মহাশয় । গঙ্গাতীর যাইতে মহাপ্ৰভুর মন হয় ॥ ১৯০ ॥

tabe mukunda datta kahe, — ‘śuna, mahāśaya gaṅgā-tīra yāite mahāprabhura mana haya

English translation

Translation

Mukunda Datta then told the Muslim governor, “My dear sir, please hear. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu wishes to go to the bank of the Ganges.

Word meanings

tabe — thereafter ; mukunda datta kahe — Mukunda Datta, a devotee of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, said ; śuna mahāśaya — my dear sir, kindly hear me ; gaṅgā - tīra yāite — to go to the bank of the Ganges ; mahāprabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mana — the mind or desire ; haya — is .

Madhya-lila 16.191

Source

তাহাঁ যাইতে কর তুমি সহায়-প্রকার । এই বড় আজ্ঞা, এই বড় উপকার ॥’ ১৯১ ॥

tāhāṅ yāite kara tumi sahāya-prakāra ei baḍa ājñā, ei baḍa upakāra’

English translation

Translation

“Please give Him all assistance so that He can go there. This is your first great order, and if you can comply, you will render a great service.”

Word meanings

tāhāṅ yāite — to go there ; kara — do ; tumi — you ; sahāya - prakāra — all kinds of assistance ; ei baḍa ājñā — this is a great order ; ei baḍa upakāra — this is a great favor .

Madhya-lila 16.192

Source

তবে সেই মহাপ্রভুর চরণ বন্দিয়া । সবার চরণ বন্দি’ চলে হৃষ্ট হঞা ॥ ১৯২ ॥

tabe sei mahāprabhura caraṇa vandiyā sabāra caraṇa vandi’ cale hṛṣṭa hañā

English translation

Translation

After this, the Muslim governor offered prayers to the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, as well as to the lotus feet of all His devotees. After that, the governor departed. Indeed, he was very pleased.

Word meanings

tabe — thereafter ; sei — the governor ; mahāprabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; caraṇa vandiyā — after worshiping the lotus feet ; sabāra caraṇa vandi’ — offering respect to the feet of all the other devotees ; cale — departed ; hṛṣṭa hañā — being very pleased .

Madhya-lila 16.193

Source

মহাপাত্র তাঁর সনে কৈল কোলাকুলি । অনেক সামগ্রী দিয়া করিল মিতালি ॥ ১৯৩ ॥

mahā-pātra tāṅra sane kaila kolākuli aneka sāmagrī diyā karila mitāli

English translation

Translation

Before the governor left, the mahā-pātra embraced him and offered him many gifts. He thus established a friendship with him.

Word meanings

mahā - pātra — the Orissan representative ; tāṅra sane — with him ; kaila — performed ; kolākuli — embracing ; aneka — various ; sāmagrī — items ; diyā — giving as gifts ; karila mitāli — established friendship .

Madhya-lila 16.194

Source

প্রাতঃকালে সেই বহু নৌকা সাজাঞা । প্ৰভুকে আনিতে দিল বিশ্বাস পাঠাঞা ॥ ১৯৪ ॥

prātaḥ-kāle sei bahu naukā sājāñā prabhuke ānite dila viśvāsa pāṭhāñā

English translation

Translation

The next morning the governor sent his secretary with many nicely decorated boats to bring Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu to the other side of the river.

Word meanings

prātaḥ - kāle — in the morning ; sei — the governor ; bahu — many ; naukā — boats ; sājāñā — decorating ; prabhuke — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ānite — to bring ; dila — gave ; viśvāsa — the secretary ; pāṭhāñā — sending .

Madhya-lila 16.195

Source

মহাপাত্র চলি’ আইলা মহাপ্ৰভুর সনে । ম্লেচ্ছ আসি’ কৈল প্রভুর চরণ বন্দনে ॥ ১৯৫ ॥

mahā-pātra cali’ āilā mahāprabhura sane mleccha āsi’ kaila prabhura caraṇa vandane

English translation

Translation

The mahā-pātra crossed the river with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, and when they reached the other shore, the Muslim governor personally received the Lord and worshiped His lotus feet.

Word meanings

mahā - pātra — the Orissan government representative ; cali’ — moving ; āilā — went ; mahāprabhura sane — with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mleccha — the governor of the other side ; āsi’ — coming ; kaila — performed ; prabhura caraṇa vandane — worshiping the lotus feet of the Lord .

Madhya-lila 16.196

Source

এক নবীন নৌকা, তার মধ্যে ঘর । স্বগণে চড়াইলা প্রভু তাহার উপর ॥ ১৯৬ ॥

eka navīna naukā, tāra madhye ghara sva-gaṇe caḍāilā prabhu tāhāra upara

English translation

Translation

One of the boats had been newly constructed, and it had a room in the middle. It was on this boat that they put Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and His associates.

Word meanings

eka — one ; navīna — new ; naukā — boat ; tāra — of which ; madhye — in the middle ; ghara — a room ; sva - gaṇe — with His associates ; caḍāilā — put on board ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāhāra upara — on it .

Madhya-lila 16.197

Source

মহাপাত্রে মহাপ্ৰভু করিলা বিদায় । কান্দিতে কান্দিতে সেই তীরে রহি’ চায় ॥ ১৯৭ ॥

mahā-pātre mahāprabhu karilā vidāya kāndite kāndite sei tīre rahi’ cāya

English translation

Translation

Finally Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu bade farewell to the mahā-pātra. Standing on the riverbank and looking at the boat, the mahā-pātra began to cry.

Word meanings

mahā - pātre — unto the mahā-pātra ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; karilā vidāya — bade farewell ; kāndite kāndite — crying and crying ; sei — that mahā-pātra ; tīre — on the bank ; rahi’ cāya — stood and watched .

Madhya-lila 16.198

Source

জলদস্যুভয়ে সেই যবন চলিল । দশ নৌকা ভরি’ বহু সৈন্য সঙ্গে নিল ॥ ১৯৮ ॥

jala-dasyu-bhaye sei yavana calila daśa naukā bhari’ bahu sainya saṅge nila

English translation

Translation

The Muslim governor then personally accompanied Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Because of pirates, the governor took ten boats full of many soldiers.

Word meanings

jala - dasyu - bhaye — because of fearing pirates ; sei — that ; yavana — Muslim governor ; calila — went along ; daśa naukā bhari’ — filling ten boats ; bahu — many ; sainya — soldiers ; saṅge — with him ; nila — took .

Madhya-lila 16.199

Source

‘মন্ত্রেশ্বর’-দুষ্টনদে পার করাইল । ‘পিছল্দা’ পর্যন্ত সেই যবন আইল ॥ ১৯৯ ॥

‘mantreśvara’-duṣṭa-nade pāra karāila ‘pichaldā’ paryanta sei yavana āila

English translation

Translation

The Muslim governor accompanied Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu past Mantreśvara. This place was very dangerous due to pirates. He took the Lord to a place named Pichaldā, which was near Mantreśvara.

Word meanings

mantreśvara — named Mantreśvara ; duṣṭa - nade — at a dangerous spot in the river ; pāra karāila — arranged to cross ; pichaldā paryanta — up to the place named Pichaldā ; sei — that ; yavana — Muslim governor ; āila — accompanied Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Purport

The very wide mouth of the Ganges near present-day Diamond Harbour was called Mantreśvara. Through the Ganges, the boat entered the Rūpa-nārāyaṇa River and reached the village of Pichaldā. Pichaldā and Mantreśvara are located very close together. After passing Mantreśvara, the Muslim governor accompanied the Lord as far as Pichaldā.

Madhya-lila 16.200

Source

তাঁরে বিদায় দিল প্রভু সেই গ্রাম হৈতে । সে-কালে তাঁর প্রেম-চেষ্টা না পারি বর্ণিতে ॥ ২০০ ॥

tāṅre vidāya dila prabhu sei grāma haite se-kāle tāṅra prema-ceṣṭā nā pāri varṇite

English translation

Translation

Finally Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu bade the governor farewell. The intense ecstatic love exhibited by the governor cannot be described.

Word meanings

tāṅre — unto the governor ; vidāya dila — bade farewell ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; sei grāma haite — from the village known as Pichaldā ; se - kāle — in those days ; tāṅra — his ; prema - ceṣṭā — activities in ecstatic love ; nā pāri — I am not able ; varṇite — to describe .

Purport

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu bade farewell to the Muslim governor at Pichaldā. Kṛṣṇadāsa Kavirāja Gosvāmī herein states that the governor experienced symptoms of ecstatic love due to being separated from Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. These symptoms, he admits, cannot be described.

Madhya-lila 16.201

Source

অলৌকিক লীলা করে শ্রীকৃষ্ণচৈতন্য । যেই ইহা শুনে তাঁর জন্ম, দেহ ধন্য ॥ ২০১ ॥

alaukika līlā kare śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya yei ihā śune tāṅra janma, deha dhanya

English translation

Translation

Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s pastimes are all uncommon. Whoever listens to His activities becomes glorious, and his life becomes perfect.

Word meanings

alaukika — uncommon ; līlā — pastimes ; kare — performs ; śrī - kṛṣṇa - caitanya — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yei — anyone who ; ihā — this ; śune — hears ; tāṅra — his ; janma — birth ; deha — body ; dhanya — glorified .

Madhya-lila 16.202

Source

সেই নৌকা চড়ি’ প্রভু আইলা ‘পানিহাটি’ । নাবিকেরে পরাইল নিজ-কৃপা-সাটি ॥ ২০২ ॥

sei naukā caḍi’ prabhu āilā ‘pānihāṭi’ nāvikere parāila nija-kṛpā-sāṭī

English translation

Translation

The Lord finally reached Pānihāṭi, and as an act of mercy He gave the captain of the boat one of His personal garments.

Word meanings

sei naukā caḍi’ — boarding the same boat ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āilā — reached ; pānihāṭi — the place named Pānihāṭi ; nāvikere — the captain of the boat ; parāila — He put on ; nija - kṛpā - sāṭī — His own used cloth as special mercy .

Madhya-lila 16.203

Source

‘প্ৰভু আইলা’ বলি’ লোকে হৈল কোলাহল । মনুষ্য ভরিল সব, কিবা জল, স্থল ॥ ২০৩ ॥

‘prabhu āilā’ bali’ loke haila kolāhala manuṣya bharila saba, kibā jala, sthala

English translation

Translation

The place called Pānihāṭi was located on the bank of the Ganges. After hearing that Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu had arrived, all kinds of men assembled both on land and on the water.

Word meanings

prabhu āilā — the Lord has arrived ; bali’ — saying ; loke — among the residents ; haila — there was ; kolāhala — great broadcasting ; manuṣya — all kinds of men ; bharila — filled ; saba — all ; kibā jala — either on the water ; sthala — or on land .

Purport

The village of Pānihāṭi is situated on the banks of the Ganges near Khaḍadaha.

Madhya-lila 16.204

Source

রাঘব-পণ্ডিত আসি’ প্রভু লঞা গেলা । পথে যাইতে লোকভিড়ে কষ্টে-সৃষ্ট্যে আইলা ॥ ২০৪ ॥

rāghava-paṇḍita āsi’ prabhu lañā gelā pathe yāite loka-bhiḍe kaṣṭe-sṛṣṭye āilā

English translation

Translation

At length Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was taken away by Rāghava Paṇḍita. There was a great crowd assembled along the way, and the Lord reached Rāghava Paṇḍita’s residence with great difficulty.

Word meanings

rāghava - paṇḍita — Rāghava Paṇḍita ; āsi’ — coming ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; lañā — taking ; gelā — went to his place ; pathe yāite — passing on the road ; loka - bhiḍe — in the crowd of men ; kaṣṭe - sṛṣṭye — with great difficulty ; āilā — reached .

Madhya-lila 16.205

Source

একদিন প্রভু তথা করিয়া নিবাস । প্রাতে কুমারহট্টে আইলা, — যাহাঁ শ্রীনিবাস ॥ ২০৫ ॥

eka-dina prabhu tathā kariyā nivāsa prāte kumārahaṭṭe āilā, — yāhāṅ śrīnivāsa

English translation

Translation

The Lord stayed at Rāghava Paṇḍita’s place for only one day. The next morning, He went to Kumārahaṭṭa, where Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura lived.

Word meanings

eka - dina — one day ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tathā — there ; kariyā nivāsa — residing ; prāte — in the morning ; kumārahaṭṭe — the town named Kumārahaṭṭa ; āilā — reached ; yāhāṅ — where ; śrīnivāsa — the home of Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura .

Purport

The present name of Kumārahaṭṭa is Hālisahara. After Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu accepted sannyāsa, Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura left Navadvīpa due to separation from Him and went to Hālisahara to live.

From Kumārahaṭṭa, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu went to Kāñcanapallī (also known as Kāṅcaḍāpāḍā), where Śivānanda Sena lived. After staying two days at Śivānanda’s house, the Lord went to the house of Vāsudeva Datta. From there He went to the western side of Navadvīpa, to the village called Vidyānagara. From Vidyānagara He went to Kuliyā-grāma and stayed at Mādhava dāsa’s house. He stayed there one week and excused the offenses of Devānanda and others. Due to Kavirāja Gosvāmī’s mentioning the name of Śāntipurācārya, some people think that Kuliyā is a village near Kāṅcaḍāpāḍā. Due to this mistaken idea, they invented another place known as New Kuliyāra Pāṭa. Actually such a place does not exist. Leaving the house of Vāsudeva Datta, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu went to the house of Advaita Ācārya. From there He went to the western side of Navadvīpa, to Vidyānagara, and stayed at the house of Vidyā-vācaspati. These accounts are given in the Caitanya-bhāgavata, Caitanya-maṅgala, Caitanyacandrodaya-nāṭaka and Caitanya-carita-kāvya. Śrīla Kavirāja Gosvāmī has not vividly described this entire tour; therefore, on the basis of Caitanya-caritāmṛta, some unscrupulous people have invented a place called Kuliyāra Pāṭa near Kāṅcaḍāpāḍā

Madhya-lila 16.206

Source

তাহাঁ হৈতে আগে গেলা শিবানন্দ-ঘর । বাসুদেব-গৃহে পাছে আইলা ঈশ্বর ॥ ২০৬ ॥

tāhāṅ haite āge gelā śivānanda-ghara vāsudeva-gṛhe pāche āilā īśvara

English translation

Translation

From the house of Śrīvāsa Ṭhākura, the Lord went to the house of Śivānanda Sena and then to the house of Vāsudeva Datta.

Word meanings

tāhāṅ haite — from there ; āge — ahead ; gelā — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu proceeded ; śivānanda - ghara — to the house of Śivānanda Sena ; vāsudeva - gṛhe — to the house of Vāsudeva Datta ; pāche — after this ; āilā — came ; īśvara — the Lord .

Madhya-lila 16.207

Source

‘বাচস্পতি-গৃহে’ প্রভু যেমতে রহিলা । লোক-ভিড় ভয়ে যৈছে ‘কুলিয়া’ আইলা ॥ ২০৭ ॥

‘vācaspati-gṛhe’ prabhu yemate rahilā loka-bhiḍa bhaye yaiche ‘kuliyā’ āilā

English translation

Translation

The Lord remained some time at the house of Vidyā-vācaspati, but then, because it was too crowded, He went to Kuliyā.

Word meanings

vācaspati - gṛhe — at the house of Vidyā-vācaspati ; prabhu — the Lord ; yemate — as ; rahilā — stayed there for some time ; loka - bhiḍa bhaye — due to fear of crowds of people ; yaiche — just as ; kuliyā āilā — He came to Kuliyā, the present city of Navadvīpa .

Purport

The house of Vidyā-vācaspati was located at Vidyānagara, which was near Koladvīpa, or Kuliyā. It was here that Devānanda Paṇḍita was residing. This information is found in the Caitanya-bhāgavata ( Madhya-khaṇḍa, chapter twenty-one). In the Caitanya-candrodaya-nāṭaka, the following statement is given about Kuliyā. Tataḥ kumārahaṭṭe śrīvāsa-paṇḍita-vāṭyām abhyāyayau: “From there the Lord went to the house of Śrīvāsa Paṇḍita in Kumārahaṭṭa”; tato ’dvaita-vāṭīm abhyetya haridāsenābhivanditas tathaiva taraṇī-vartmanā navadvīpasya pāre kuliyā-nāma-grāme mādhava-dāsa-vāṭyām uttīrṇavān. evaṁ sapta-dināni tatra sthitvā punas taṭa-vartmanā eva calitavān: “From the house of Śrīvāsa Ācārya, the Lord went to the house of Advaita Ācārya, where He was offered obeisances by Haridāsa Ṭhākura. The Lord then took a boat to the other side of Navadvīpa, to a place called Kuliyā, where He stayed seven days at the house of Mādhava dāsa. He then proceeded along the banks of the Ganges.”

In the Śrī Caitanya-carita-mahā-kāvya, it is stated, anye-dyuḥ sa śrī-navadvīpa-bhūmeḥ pāre gaṅgāṁ paścime kvāpi deśe, śrīmān sarva-prāṇināṁ tat-tad-aṅgair netrānandaṁ samyag āgatya tene: “The Lord went to the western side of the Ganges at Navadvīpa, and everyone was pleased to see the Lord coming.”

In the Caitanya-bhāgavata ( Antya-khaṇḍa, chapter three), it is stated, sarva-pāriṣada-saṅge śrī-gaurasundara/ ācambite āsi’ uttarilā tāṅra ghara: “The Lord suddenly came to Vidyānagara with a full party and stayed there in the house of Vidyā-vācaspati.” Navadvīpādi sarva-dike haila dhvani: “Thus throughout Navadvīpa, the Lord’s arrival was made known.” Vācaspati-ghare āilā nyāsi-cūḍāmaṇi: “Thus the chief of all the sannyāsīs, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, arrived at the house of Vidyā-vācaspati.” As further stated:

ananta arbuda loka bali’ ‘hari’ ‘hari’ calilena dekhibāre gaurāṅga śrī-hari

patha nāhi pāya keho lokera gahale vanaḍāla bhāṅgi’ loka daśa-dike cale

lokera gahale yata araṇya āchila kṣaṇeke sakala divya pathamaya haila

kṣaṇeke āila saba loka kheyā-ghāṭe kheyārī karite pāra paḍila saṅkaṭe

satvare āsilā vācaspati mahāśaya karilena aneka naukāra samuccaya

naukāra apekṣā āra keho nāhi kare nānā mate pāra haya ye yemate pāre

hena-mate gaṅgā pāra ha-i’ sarva-jana sabhei dharena vācaspatira caraṇa

lukāñā gelā prabhu kuliyā-nagara kuliyāya āilena vaikuṇṭha-īśvara

sarva-loka ‘hari’ bali’ vācaspati-saṅge sei-kṣaṇe sabhe calilena mahā-raṅge

kuliyā-nagare āilena nyāsi-maṇi sei-kṣaṇe sarva-dike haila mahā-dhvani

sabe gaṅgā madhye nadīyāya-kuliyāya śuni’ mātra sarva-loke mahānande dhāya

vācaspatira grāme ( vidyānagare ) chila yateka gahala tāra koṭi koṭi-guṇe pūrila sakala

lakṣa lakṣa naukā vā āila kothā haite nā jāni kateka pāra haya kata-mate

lakṣa lakṣa loka bhāse jāhnavīra jale sabhe pāra hayena parama kutūhale

gaṅgāya hañā pāra āpanā-āpani kolākoli kari’ sabhe kare hari-dhvani

kṣaṇeke kuliyā-grāma — nagara prāntara paripūrṇa haila sthala, nāhi avasara

kṣaṇeke āilā mahāśaya vācaspati teṅho nāhi pāyena prabhura kothā sthiti

kuliyāya prakāśe yateka pāpī chila uttama, madhyama, nīca, — sabe pāra haila

kuliyā-grāmete āsi’ śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya hena nāhi, yāre prabhu nā karilā dhanya

“When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu stayed at Vidyā-vācaspati’s house, many hundreds of thousands of people went to see Him and chant the holy name of Hari. It was so crowded that people could not even find a place to walk; therefore they made room by clearing out the jungles near the village. Many roads were automatically excavated, and many people also came by boat to see the Lord. So many came that it was difficult for the boatmen to get them across the river. When Vidyā-vācaspati suddenly arrived, he made arrangements for many boats to receive these people, but the people would not wait for the boats. Somehow or other they crossed the river and hurried toward the house of Vidyā-vācaspati. Due to this great crowd, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu secretly went to Kuliyā-nagara. After the Lord left Vidyānagara, however, all the people heard news of His leaving. They then accompanied Vācaspati to Kuliyā-nagara. Since the news of the Lord’s arrival was immediately broadcast, large crowds arrived and greeted Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu with great jubilation. Indeed, when the crowd went to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, it increased ten thousand times in number. No one could say how many people crossed the river to see Him, but many hundreds of thousands made a great tumult when crossing the river Ganges. After crossing the river, everyone began to embrace one another because they heard the good news of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s arrival. Thus all the inhabitants of Kuliyā — the sinful, intermediate and spiritually advanced — were delivered and glorified by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.”

As stated in the Caitanya-bhāgavata ( Antya-khaṇḍa, chapter six):

khānāyoḍā, baḍagāchi, āra dogāchiyā gaṅgāra opāra kabhu yāyena ‘kuliyā’

“Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu passed through Khānāyoḍā, Baḍagāchi and Dogāchiyā and then crossed the Ganges before arriving in Kuliyā.”

As stated in the Caitanya-maṅgala:

gaṅgā-snāna kari prabhu rāḍha-deśa diyā krame krame uttarilā nagara ‘kuliyā’

māyera vacane punaḥ gelā navadvīpa vārakoṇā-ghāṭa, nija vāḍīra samīpa

“Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu walked through Rāḍha-deśa and gradually arrived at the Ganges. After bathing in the river, he crossed it and went to Kuliyā. Because He had promised His mother He would return to Navadvīpa, He went to Vārakoṇā-ghāṭa, a village near His house.”

In the commentary of Premadāsa it is said:

nadīyāra mājhakhāne, sakala lokete jāne, ‘kuliyā-pāhāḍapura’ nāme sthāna

“Everyone knows that in the middle of Nadia is a village named Kuliyā-pāhāḍapura.”

Śrī Narahari Cakravartī, or Ghanaśyāma dāsa, has written in his Bhakti-ratnākara:

kuliyā pāhāḍapura dekha śrīnivāsa pūrve ‘koladvīpa’-parvatākhya — e pracāra

“He said, ‘O Śrīnivāsa, just see the town of Kuliyā-pāhāḍapura, which was previously known as Koladvīpa.’ ”

In a book named Navadvīpa-dhāma-parikramā, also written by Ghanaśyāma dāsa, it is stated: kuliyā-pāhāḍapura grāma pūrve koladvīpa-parvatākhyānanda nāma. “The town of Kuliyā-pāhāḍapura was previously named Koladvīpa-parvatākhyānanda.”

Therefore one can conclude that the present-day city of Navadvīpa and the places known as Bāhiradvīpa, Kolera Gañja, Kola-āmāda, Kolera Daha, Gadakhāli, etc., were known as Kuliyā, but the so-called Kuliyāra Pāṭa is not the original Kuliyā.

Madhya-lila 16.208

Source

মাধবদাস-গৃহে তথা শচীর নন্দন । লক্ষ-কোটি লোক তথা পাইল দরশন ॥ ২০৮ ॥

mādhava-dāsa-gṛhe tathā śacīra nandana lakṣa-koṭi loka tathā pāila daraśana

English translation

Translation

When the Lord stayed at the house of Mādhava dāsa, many hundreds of thousands of people came to see Him.

Word meanings

mādhava - dāsa - gṛhe — at the house of Mādhava dāsa ; tathā — there ; śacīra nandana — the son of mother Śacī ; lakṣa - koṭi loka — many hundreds of thousands of people ; tathā — there ; pāila daraśana — got His audience .

Purport

Mādhava dāsa is identified as follows. In the family of Śrīkara Caṭṭopādhyāya, Yudhiṣṭhira Caṭṭopādhyāya took his birth. Formerly, he and his family members lived in Bilvagrāma and Pāṭūli. From there he went to Kuliyā-pāhāḍapura, formerly known as Pāḍapura. The eldest son of Yudhiṣṭhira Caṭṭopādhyāya was known as Mādhava dāsa, the second son was called Haridāsa, and the youngest son was called Kṛṣṇasampatti Caṭṭopādhyāya. The three brothers’ nicknames were Chakaḍi, Tinakaḍi and Dukaḍi. The grandson of Mādhava dāsa was named Vaṁśīvadana, and, during the time of Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura, his grandson Rāmacandra and their descendants were still living at Vāghnāpāḍā, or Vaiñcī.

Madhya-lila 16.209

Source

সাত দিন রহি’ তথা লোক নিস্তারিলা । সব অপরাধিগণে প্রকারে তারিলা ॥ ২০৯ ॥

sāta dina rahi’ tathā loka nistārilā saba aparādhi-gaṇe prakāre tārilā

English translation

Translation

The Lord stayed there for seven days and delivered all kinds of offenders and sinners.

Word meanings

sāta dina — seven days ; rahi’ — staying ; tathā — there ; loka — the people ; nistārilā — He liberated ; saba — all ; aparādhi - gaṇe — the offenders ; prakāre — in some fashion ; tārilā — delivered .

Madhya-lila 16.210

Source

‘শান্তিপুরাচার্য’-গৃহে ঐছে আইলা । শচী-মাতা মিলি’ তাঁর দুঃখ খণ্ডাইলা ॥ ২১০ ॥

‘śāntipurācārya’-gṛhe aiche āilā śacī-mātā mili’ tāṅra duḥkha khaṇḍāilā

English translation

Translation

After leaving Kuliyā, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu visited the house of Advaita Ācārya at Śāntipura. It was there that the Lord’s mother, Śacīmātā, met Him and was thus relieved of her great unhappiness.

Word meanings

śāntipura - ācārya — of Advaita Ācārya ; gṛhe — to the house ; aiche — similarly ; āilā — went ; śacī - mātā — mother Śacī ; mili’ — meeting ; tāṅra — her ; duḥkha — unhappiness ; khaṇḍāilā — pacified .

Madhya-lila 16.211

Source

তবে ‘রামকেলি’-গ্রামে প্রভু যৈছে গেলা । ‘নাটশালা’ হৈতে প্রভু পুনঃ ফিরি’ আইলা ॥ ২১১ ॥

tabe ‘rāmakeli’-grāme prabhu yaiche gelā ‘nāṭaśālā’ haite prabhu punaḥ phiri’ āilā

English translation

Translation

The Lord then visited the village known as Rāmakeli and the place known as Kānāi Nāṭaśālā. From there He returned to Śāntipura.

Word meanings

tabe — thereafter ; rāmakeli - grāme — in the village known as Rāmakeli ; prabhu — Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yaiche — similarly ; gelā — went ; nāṭaśālā — the place known as Kānāi Nāṭaśālā ; haite — from ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; punaḥ — again ; phiri’ āilā — returned .

Madhya-lila 16.212

Source

শান্তিপুরে পুনঃ কৈল দশ-দিন বাস । বিস্তারি’ বর্ণিয়াছেন বৃন্দাবন-দাস ॥ ২১২ ॥

śāntipure punaḥ kaila daśa-dina vāsa vistāri’ varṇiyāchena vṛndāvana-dāsa

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu stayed in Śāntipura for ten days. This has all been described very elaborately by Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura.

Word meanings

śāntipure — at Śāntipura ; punaḥ — again ; kaila — made ; daśa - dina — for ten days ; vāsa — residence ; vistāri’ — elaborating ; varṇiyāchena — has described ; vṛndāvana - dāsa — Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura .

Madhya-lila 16.213

Source

অতএব ইহাঁ তার না কৈলুঁ বিস্তার । পুনরুক্তি হয়, গ্রন্থ বাড়য়ে অপার ॥ ২১৩ ॥

ataeva ihāṅ tāra nā kailuṅ vistāra punarukti haya, grantha bāḍaye apāra

English translation

Translation

I will not narrate these incidents because they have already been described by Vṛndāvana dāsa Ṭhākura. There is no need to repeat the same information, for such repetition would unlimitedly increase the size of this book.

Word meanings

ataeva — therefore ; ihāṅ — here ; tāra — of that incident ; nā kailuṅ — I did not give ; vistāra — elaboration ; punarukti — repetition ; haya — it is ; grantha — the book ; bāḍaye — increases ; apāra — unlimitedly .

Madhya-lila 16.214-215

Source

তার মধ্যে মিলিলা যৈছে রূপ-সনাতন । নৃসিংহানন্দ কৈল যৈছে পথের সাজন ॥ ২১৪ ॥ সুত্রমধ্যে সেই লীলা আমি ত’ বর্ণিলুঁ । অতএব পুনঃ তাহা ইহাঁ না লিখিলুঁ ॥ ২১৫ ॥

tāra madhye mililā yaiche rūpa-sanātana nṛsiṁhānanda kaila yaiche pathera sājana sūtra-madhye sei līlā āmi ta’ varṇiluṅ ataeva punaḥ tāhā ihāṅ nā likhiluṅ

English translation

Translation

Those narrations tell how Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu met the brothers Rūpa and Sanātana and how Nṛsiṁhānanda decorated the road. I have already described these in an earlier synopsis of this book; therefore I will not repeat the narrations here.

Word meanings

tāra madhye — within that ; mililā — He met ; yaiche — how ; rūpa - sanātana — the two brothers Rūpa and Sanātana ; nṛsiṁhānanda — Nṛsiṁhānanda ; kaila — did ; yaiche — how ; pathera sājana — decoration of the road ; sūtra - madhye — in the synopsis ; sei līlā — those pastimes ; āmi — I ; ta’ — indeed ; varṇiluṅ — have described ; ataeva — therefore ; punaḥ — again ; tāhā — that ; ihāṅ — here ; nā likhiluṅ — I have not written .

Purport

This information is given in Ādi-līlā 10.35 and Madhya-līlā 1.155-162 and 175-226.

Madhya-lila 16.216

Source

পুনরপি প্রভু যদি ‘শান্তিপুর’ আইলা । রঘুনাথ-দাস আসি’ প্রভুরে মিলিলা ॥ ২১৬ ॥

punarapi prabhu yadi ‘śāntipura’ āilā raghunātha-dāsa āsi’ prabhure mililā

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu returned to Śāntipura, Raghunātha dāsa came to meet Him.

Word meanings

punarapi — again ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; yadi — when ; śāntipura āilā — came to Śāntipura ; raghunātha - dāsa — Raghunātha dāsa ; āsi’ — coming ; prabhure mililā — met Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu .

Madhya-lila 16.217

Source

‘হিরণ্য,’ ‘গোবর্ধন,’-দুই সহোদর । সপ্তগ্রামে বারলক্ষ মুদ্রার ঈশ্বর ॥ ২১৭ ॥

‘hiraṇya’, ‘govardhana’, — dui sahodara saptagrāme bāra-lakṣa mudrāra īśvara

English translation

Translation

Two brothers named Hiraṇya and Govardhana, who were residents of Saptagrāma, had an annual income of 1,200,000 rupees.

Word meanings

hiraṇya — Hiraṇya ; govardhana — Govardhana ; dui sahodara — two brothers ; saptagrāme — in the village named Saptagrāma ; bāra - lakṣa — 1,200,000 ; mudrāra — of coins ; īśvara — the masters .

Purport

Hiraṇya and Govardhana were inhabitants of Saptagrāma in the district of Hugli. Actually they were inhabitants not of Saptagrāma but of a nearby village named Kṛṣṇapura. They took their birth in a big kāyastha family, and although their family title has not been ascertained, it is known that they came from an aristocratic family. The elder brother’s name was Hiraṇya Majumadāra, and the younger brother’s name was Govardhana Majumadāra. Śrī Raghunātha dāsa was the son of Govardhana Majumadāra. Their family priest was Balarāma Ācārya, who was a favorite of Haridāsa Ṭhākura’s, and the family’s spiritual master was Yadunandana Ācārya, a favorite of Vāsudeva Datta’s.

The village of Saptagrāma is located on the Eastern Railway from Calcutta to Burdwan, and presently the railway station is called Triśabighā. In those days there was a large river there known as the Sarasvatī, and present-day Triśabighā is a great port. In 1592, the Pāṭhānas invaded, and due to a flooding of the Sarasvatī River in the year 1632, this great port was partially destroyed. It is said that in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, Portuguese businessmen used to come aboard their ships. In those days, Saptagrāma, situated on the southern side of Bengal, was very rich and popular. The merchants, who were the principal residents, were called Saptagrāma suvarṇa-vaṇiks. There were very many rich people there, and Hiraṇya Majumadāra and Govardhana Majumadāra belonged to the kāyastha community. They also were very rich, so much so that it is mentioned in this verse that their annual income as landlords amounted to 1,200,000 rupees. In this connection, one may refer to Ādi-līlā (chapter eleven, verse 41), which describes Uddhāraṇa Datta, who also belonged to the Saptagrāmī suvarṇa-vaṇik community.

Madhya-lila 16.218

Source

মহৈশ্বর্যযুক্ত দুঁহে — বদান্য, ব্রহ্মণ্য । সদাচারী, সৎকুলীন, ধার্মিকাগ্রগণ্য ॥ ২১৮ ॥

mahaiśvarya-yukta duṅhe — vadānya, brahmaṇya sadācārī, satkulīna, dhārmikāgra-gaṇya

English translation

Translation

Both Hiraṇya Majumadāra and Govardhana Majumadāra were very opulent and magnanimous. They were well behaved and devoted to brahminical culture. They belonged to an aristocratic family, and among religionists they were predominant.

Word meanings

mahā - aiśvarya - yukta — very opulent in riches ; duṅhe — both the brothers ; vadānya — very magnanimous ; brahmaṇya — devoted to brahminical culture ; sat - ācārī — well behaved ; sat - kulīna — aristocratic ; dhārmika - agra - gaṇya — on the top of the list of religious persons .

Madhya-lila 16.219

Source

নদীয়া-বাসী ব্রাহ্মণের উপজীব্য-প্রায় । অর্থ, ভূমি, গ্রাম দিয়া করেন সহায় ॥ ২১৯ ॥

nadīyā-vāsī, brāhmaṇera upajīvya-prāya artha, bhūmi, grāma diyā karena sahāya

English translation

Translation

Practically all the brāhmaṇas residing in Nadia were dependent on the charity of Hiraṇya and Govardhana, who gave them money, land and villages.

Word meanings

nadīyā - vāsī — inhabitants of Nadia ; brāhmaṇera — of all brāhmaṇas ; upajīvya - prāya — almost the entire source of income ; artha — money ; bhūmi — land ; grāma — villages ; diyā — giving as charity ; karena sahāya — give help .

Purport

Although Navadvīpa was very opulent and populous during Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s time, practically all the brāhmaṇas depended on the charity of Hiraṇya and Govardhana. Because the brothers highly respected the brāhmaṇas, they very liberally gave them money.

Madhya-lila 16.220

Source

নীলাম্বর চক্রবর্তী — আরাধ্য দুঁহার । চক্রবর্তী করে দুঁহায় ‘ভ্রাতৃ’-ব্যবহার ॥ ২২০ ॥

nīlāmbara cakravartī — ārādhya duṅhāra cakravartī kare duṅhāya ‘bhrātṛ’-vyavahāra

English translation

Translation

Nīlāmbara Cakravartī, the grandfather of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, was much worshiped by the two brothers, but Nīlāmbara Cakravartī used to treat them as his own brothers.

Word meanings

nīlāmbara cakravartī — the grandfather of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ārādhya duṅhāra — very worshipable for these two ; cakravartī — Nīlāmbara Cakravartī ; kare — does ; duṅhāya — to the two of them ; bhrātṛ - vyavahāra — treating as brothers .

Madhya-lila 16.221

Source

মিশ্র-পুরন্দরের পূর্বে কর্যাছেন সেবনে । অতএব প্রভু ভাল জানে দুইজনে ॥ ২২১ ॥

miśra-purandarera pūrve karyāchena sevane ataeva prabhu bhāla jāne dui-jane

English translation

Translation

Formerly, these two brothers had rendered much service to Miśra Purandara, the father of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. Because of this, the Lord knew them very well.

Word meanings

miśra - purandarera — to Purandara Miśra, the father of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; pūrve — previously ; karyāchena sevane — had rendered service ; ataeva — therefore ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; bhāla — very well ; jāne — knew ; dui - jane — the two brothers .

Madhya-lila 16.222

Source

সেই গোবর্ধনের পুত্র — রঘুনাথ দাস । বাল্যকাল হৈতে তেঁহো বিষয়ে উদাস ॥ ২২২ ॥

sei govardhanera putra — raghunātha dāsa bālya-kāla haite teṅho viṣaye udāsa

English translation

Translation

Raghunātha dāsa was the son of Govardhana Majumadāra. From childhood, he was uninterested in material enjoyment.

Word meanings

sei — that ; govardhanera putra — son of Govardhana Majumadāra ; raghunātha dāsa — Raghunātha dāsa ; bālya - kāla haite — from his very childhood ; teṅho — he ; viṣaye udāsa — indifferent to material happiness .

Madhya-lila 16.223

Source

সন্ন্যাস করি’ প্রভু যবে শান্তিপুর আইলা । তবে আসি’ রঘুনাথ প্রভুরে মিলিলা ॥ ২২৩ ॥

sannyāsa kari’ prabhu yabe śāntipura āilā tabe āsi’ raghunātha prabhure mililā

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu returned to Śāntipura after accepting the renounced order, Raghunātha dāsa met Him.

Word meanings

sannyāsa kari’ — after accepting the sannyāsa order ; prabhu — the Lord ; yabe — when ; śāntipura āilā — went to Śāntipura ; tabe — at that time ; āsi’ — coming ; raghunātha — Raghunātha dāsa ; prabhure — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; mililā — met .

Madhya-lila 16.224

Source

প্রভুর চরণে পড়ে প্রেমাবিষ্ট হঞা । প্রভু পাদস্পর্শ কৈল করুণা করিয়া ॥ ২২৪ ॥

prabhura caraṇe paḍe premāviṣṭa hañā prabhu pāda-sparśa kaila karuṇā kariyā

English translation

Translation

When Raghunātha dāsa went to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, he fell at the Lord’s lotus feet in ecstatic love. Showing him mercy, the Lord touched him with His feet.

Word meanings

prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; caraṇe — at the lotus feet ; paḍe — fell down ; prema - āviṣṭa — absorbed in ecstatic love ; hañā — becoming ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; pāda - sparśa kaila — touched with His feet ; karuṇā — mercy ; kariyā — showing .

Madhya-lila 16.225

Source

তাঁর পিতা সদা করে আচার্য-সেবন । অতএব আচার্য তাঁরে হৈলা পরসন্ন ॥ ২২৫ ॥

tāṅra pitā sadā kare ācārya-sevana ataeva ācārya tāṅre hailā parasanna

English translation

Translation

Raghunātha dāsa’s father, Govardhana, always rendered much service to Advaita Ācārya. Consequently Advaita Ācārya was very pleased with the family.

Word meanings

tāṅra pitā — his father ; sadā — always ; kare — performs ; ācārya - sevana — worship of Advaita Ācārya ; ataeva ācārya — therefore Advaita Ācārya ; tāṅre — upon him ; hailā parasanna — became pleased .

Madhya-lila 16.226

Source

আচার্য-প্রসাদে পাইল প্রভুর উচ্ছিষ্ট-পাত । প্রভুর চরণ দেখে দিন পাঁচ-সাত ॥ ২২৬ ॥

ācārya-prasāde pāila prabhura ucchiṣṭa-pāta prabhura caraṇa dekhe dina pāṅca-sāta

English translation

Translation

When Raghunātha dāsa was there, Advaita Ācārya favored him by giving him the food remnants left by the Lord. Raghunātha dāsa was thus engaged for five or seven days in rendering service to the Lord’s lotus feet.

Word meanings

ācārya - prasāde — by the mercy of Advaita Ācārya ; pāila — got ; prabhura — of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ucchiṣṭa - pāta — remnants of food ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; caraṇa — lotus feet ; dekhe — sees ; dina — days ; pāṅca - sāta — five to seven .

Madhya-lila 16.227

Source

প্রভু তাঁরে বিদায় দিয়া গেলা নীলাচল । তেঁহো ঘরে আসি’ হৈলা প্রেমেতে পাগল ॥ ২২৭ ॥

prabhu tāṅre vidāya diyā gelā nīlācala teṅho ghare āsi’ hailā premete pāgala

English translation

Translation

After bidding farewell to Raghunātha dāsa, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu returned to Jagannātha Purī. After returning home, Raghunātha dāsa became mad with ecstatic love.

Word meanings

prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — unto Raghunātha dāsa ; vidāya diyā — bidding farewell ; gelā — went back ; nīlācala — to Jagannātha Purī ; teṅho — he ; ghare āsi’ — returning home ; hailā — became ; premete pāgala — mad in ecstatic love .

Madhya-lila 16.228

Source

বার বার পলায় তেঁহো নীলাদ্রি যাইতে । পিতা তাঁরে বান্ধি’ রাখে আনি’ পথ হৈতে ॥ ২২৮ ॥

bāra bāra palāya teṅho nīlādri yāite pitā tāṅre bāndhi’ rākhe āni’ patha haite

English translation

Translation

Raghunātha dāsa used to run away from home again and again to go to Jagannātha Purī, but his father kept binding him and bringing him back.

Word meanings

bāra bāra — again and again ; palāya — leaves home ; teṅho — he ; nīlādri yāite — to go to Jagannātha Purī ; pitā — his father ; tāṅre — him ; bāndhi’ — binding ; rākhe — keeps ; āni’ — bringing back ; patha haite — from the road .

Madhya-lila 16.229

Source

পঞ্চ পাইক তাঁরে রাখে রাত্রি-দিনে । চারি সেবক, দুই ব্রাহ্মণ রহে তাঁর সনে ॥ ২২৯ ॥

pañca pāika tāṅre rākhe rātri-dine cāri sevaka, dui brāhmaṇa rahe tāṅra sane

English translation

Translation

His father even had five watchmen guard him day and night. Four personal servants were employed to look after his comfort, and two brāhmaṇas were employed to cook for him.

Word meanings

pañca — five ; pāika — watchmen ; tāṅre — him (Raghunātha dāsa) ; rākhe — keep ; rātri - dine — day and night ; cāri sevaka — four personal servants ; dui brāhmaṇa — two brāhmaṇas to cook ; rahe — remain ; tāṅra sane — with him .

Madhya-lila 16.230

Source

একাদশ জন তাঁরে রাখে নিরন্তর । নীলাচলে যাইতে না পায়, দুঃখিত অন্তর ॥ ২৩০ ॥

ekādaśa jana tāṅre rākhe nirantara nīlācale yāite nā pāya, duḥkhita antara

English translation

Translation

In this way, eleven people were incessantly keeping Raghunātha dāsa under control. Thus he could not go to Jagannātha Purī, and because of this he was very unhappy.

Word meanings

ekādaśa — eleven ; jana — persons ; tāṅre — him ; rākhe — keep ; nirantara — day and night ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; yāite — to go ; nā pāya — was not able ; duḥkhita antara — very unhappy within the mind .

Madhya-lila 16.231

Source

এবে যদি মহাপ্রভু ‘শান্তিপুর’ আইলা । শুনিয়া পিতারে রঘুনাথ নিবেদিলা ॥ ২৩১ ॥

ebe yadi mahāprabhu ‘śāntipura’ āilā śuniyā pitāre raghunātha nivedilā

English translation

Translation

When Raghunātha dāsa learned that Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu had arrived at Śāntipura, he submitted a request to his father.

Word meanings

ebe — now ; yadi — when ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śāntipura — to Śāntipura ; āilā — came ; śuniyā — hearing ; pitāre — unto his father ; raghunātha — Raghunātha dāsa ; nivedilā — submitted .

Madhya-lila 16.232

Source

“আজ্ঞা দেহ,’ যাঞা দেখি প্রভুর চরণ । অন্যথা, না রহে মোর শরীরে জীবন” ॥ ২৩২ ॥

“ājñā deha’, yāñā dekhi prabhura caraṇa anyathā, nā rahe mora śarīre jīvana”

English translation

Translation

Raghunātha dāsa asked his father, “Please give me permission to go see the lotus feet of the Lord. If you do not, my life will not remain within this body.”

Word meanings

ājñā deha’ — kindly give me permission ; yāñā — going ; dekhi — I may see ; prabhura caraṇa — the lotus feet of the Lord ; anyathā — otherwise ; nā rahe — will not remain ; mora — my ; śarīre — within the body ; jīvana — life .

Madhya-lila 16.233

Source

শুনি’ তাঁর পিতা বহু লোক-দ্রব্য দিয়া । পাঠাইল বলি’ ‘শীঘ্র আসিহ ফিরিয়া’ ॥ ২৩৩ ॥

śuni’ tāṅra pitā bahu loka-dravya diyā pāṭhāila bali’ ‘śīghra āsiha phiriyā’

English translation

Translation

Hearing this request, Raghunātha dāsa’s father agreed. Giving him many servants and materials, the father sent him to see Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, requesting him to return soon.

Word meanings

śuni’ — hearing ; tāṅra — his ; pitā — father ; bahu — many ; loka - dravya — servants and materials ; diyā — giving ; pāṭhāila — sent ; bali’ — saying ; śīghra — very soon ; āsiha — come ; phiriyā — returning .

Madhya-lila 16.234

Source

সাত দিন শান্তিপুরে প্রভু-সঙ্গে রহে । রাত্রি-দিবসে এই মনঃকথা কহে ॥ ২৩৪ ॥

sāta dina śāntipure prabhu-saṅge rahe rātri-divase ei manaḥ-kathā kahe

English translation

Translation

For seven days Raghunātha dāsa associated with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu in Śāntipura. During those days and nights, he had the following thoughts.

Word meanings

sāta dina — for seven days ; śāntipure — at Śāntipura ; prabhu - saṅge — in the association of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; rahe — stayed ; rātri - divase — both day and night ; ei — these ; manaḥ - kathā — words in his mind ; kahe — says .

Madhya-lila 16.235

Source

‘রক্ষকের হাতে মুঞি কেমনে ছুটিব ! কেমনে প্রভুর সঙ্গে নীলাচলে যাব ?’ ২৩৫ ॥

‘rakṣakera hāte muñi kemane chuṭiba! kemane prabhura saṅge nīlācale yāba?’

English translation

Translation

Raghunātha dāsa thought, “How shall I be able to get free from the hands of the watchmen? How shall I be able to go with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu to Nīlācala?”

Word meanings

rakṣakera hāte — from the clutches of the watchmen ; muñi — I ; kemane — how ; chuṭiba — shall get release ; kemane — how ; prabhura saṅge — with Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; yāba — I shall go .

Madhya-lila 16.236

Source

সর্বজ্ঞ গৌরাঙ্গপ্রভু জানি’ তাঁর মন । শিক্ষা-রূপে কহে তাঁরে আশ্বাস-বচন ॥ ২৩৬ ॥

sarvajña gaurāṅga-prabhu jāni’ tāṅra mana śikṣā-rūpe kahe tāṅre āśvāsa-vacana

English translation

Translation

Since Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was omniscient, He could understand Raghunātha dāsa’s mind. The Lord therefore instructed him with the following reassuring words.

Word meanings

sarva - jña — omniscient ; gaurāṅga - prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; jāni’ — knowing ; tāṅra — his ; mana — mind ; śikṣā - rūpe — as an instruction ; kahe — says ; tāṅre — unto Raghunātha dāsa ; āśvāsa - vacana — words of assurance .

Madhya-lila 16.237

Source

“স্থির হঞা ঘরে যাও, না হও বাতুল । ক্রমে ক্রমে পায় লোক ভবসিন্ধুকূল ॥ ২৩৭ ॥

“sthira hañā ghare yāo, nā hao vātula krame krame pāya loka bhava-sindhu-kūla

English translation

Translation

“Be patient and return home. Don’t be a crazy fellow. By and by you will be able to cross the ocean of material existence.

Word meanings

sthira hañā — being patient ; ghare yāo — go back home ; nā — do not ; hao — become ; vātula — crazy ; krame krame — gradually ; pāya — gets ; loka — a person ; bhava - sindhu - kūla — the far shore of the ocean of material existence .

Purport

As stated in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.14.58) :

samāśritā ye pada-pallava-plavaṁ mahat-padaṁ puṇya-yaśo murāreḥ bhavāmbudhir vatsa-padaṁ paraṁ padaṁ padaṁ padaṁ yad vipadāṁ na teṣām

This material world is just like a big ocean. It begins with Brahmaloka and extends to Pātālaloka, and there are many planets, or islands, in this ocean. Not knowing about devotional service, the living entity wanders about this ocean, just as a man tries to swim to reach the shore. Our struggle for existence is similar to this. Everyone is trying to get out of the ocean of material existence. One cannot immediately reach the coast, but if one endeavors, he can cross the ocean by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s mercy. One may be very eager to cross this ocean, but he cannot attain success by acting like a madman. He must swim over the ocean very patiently and intelligently under the instructions of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu or His representative. Then, one day, he will reach the shore and return home, back to Godhead.

Madhya-lila 16.238

Source

মর্কট-বৈরাগ্য না কর লোক দেখাঞা । যথাযোগ্য বিষয় ভুঞ্জ’ অনাসক্ত হঞা ॥ ২৩৮ ॥

markaṭa-vairāgya nā kara loka dekhāñā yathā-yogya viṣaya bhuñja’ anāsakta hañā

English translation

Translation

“You should not make yourself a showbottle devotee and become a false renunciant. For the time being, enjoy the material world in a befitting way and do not become attached to it.”

Word meanings

markaṭa - vairāgya — monkey renunciation ; nā kara — do not do ; loka — to the people ; dekhāñā — showing off ; yathā - yogya — as it is befitting ; viṣaya — material things ; bhuñja’ — enjoy ; anāsakta — without attachment ; hañā — being .

Purport

The word markaṭa-vairāgya, indicating false renunciation, is very important in this verse. Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura, in commenting on this word, points out that monkeys make an external show of renunciation by not accepting clothing and by living naked in the forest. In this way they consider themselves renunciants, but actually they are very busy enjoying sense gratification with dozens of female monkeys. Such renunciation is called markaṭa vairāgya — the renunciation of a monkey. One cannot be really renounced until one actually becomes disgusted with material activity and sees it as a stumbling block to spiritual advancement. Renunciation should not be phalgu, temporary, but should exist throughout one’s life. Temporary renunciation, or monkey renunciation, is like the renunciation one feels at a cremation ground. When a man takes a dead body to the crematorium, he sometimes thinks, “This is the final end of the body. Why am I working so hard day and night?” Such sentiments naturally arise in the mind of any man who goes to a crematorial ghāṭa. However, as soon as he returns from the cremation grounds, he again engages in material activity for sense enjoyment. This is called śmaśāna-vairāgya, or markaṭa-vairāgya.

In order to render service to the Lord, one may accept necessary things. If one lives in this way, he may actually become renounced. In the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.2.108), it is said:

yāvatā syāt sva-nirvāhaḥ svī-kuryāt tāvad artha-vit ādhikye nyūnatāyāṁ ca cyavate paramārthataḥ

“The bare necessities of life must be accepted, but one should not superfluously increase his necessities. Nor should they be unnecessarily decreased. One should simply accept what is necessary to help one advance spiritually.”

In his Durgama-saṅgamanī, Śrī Jīva Gosvāmī comments that the word sva-nirvāhaḥ actually means sva-sva-bhakti-nirvāhaḥ. The experienced devotee will accept only those material things that will help him render service to the Lord. In the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.2.256), markaṭa-vairāgya, or phalgu-vairāgya, is explained as follows:

prāpañcikatayā buddhyā hari-sambandhi-vastunaḥ mumukṣubhiḥ parityāgo vairāgyaṁ phalgu kathyate

“When persons eager to achieve liberation renounce things related to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, thinking them to be material, their renunciation is called incomplete.” Whatever is favorable for the rendering of service to the Lord should be accepted and should not be rejected as a material thing. Yukta-vairāgya, or befitting renunciation, is thus explained:

anāsaktasya viṣayān yathārham upayuñjataḥ nirbandhaḥ kṛṣṇa-sambandhe yuktaṁ vairāgyam ucyate

“Things should be accepted for the Lord’s service and not for one’s personal sense gratification. If one accepts something without attachment and accepts it because it is related to Kṛṣṇa, one’s renunciation is called yukta-vairāgya. ” Since Kṛṣṇa is the Absolute Truth, whatever is accepted for His service is also the Absolute Truth.

The word markaṭa-vairāgya is used by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu to indicate so-called Vaiṣṇavas who dress themselves in loincloths trying to imitate Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī. Such people carry a bead bag and chant, but at heart they are always thinking about getting women and money. Unknown to others, these markaṭa-vairāgīs maintain women but externally present themselves as renunciants. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was very much opposed to these markaṭa-vairāgīs, or pseudo Vaiṣṇavas.

Madhya-lila 16.239

Source

অন্তরে নিষ্ঠা কর, বাহ্যে লোকব্যবহার । অচিরাৎ কৃষ্ণ তোমায় করিবে উদ্ধার ॥ ২৩৯ ॥

antare niṣṭhā kara, bāhye loka-vyavahāra acirāt kṛṣṇa tomāya karibe uddhāra

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu continued, “Within your heart you should keep yourself very faithful, but externally you may behave like an ordinary man. Thus Kṛṣṇa will soon be very pleased and deliver you from the clutches of māyā.

Word meanings

antare — within the heart ; niṣṭhā kara — keep strong faith ; bāhye — externally ; loka - vyavahāra — behavior like ordinary men ; acirāt — very soon ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; tomāya — unto you ; karibe — will do ; uddhāra — liberation .

Madhya-lila 16.240

Source

বৃন্দাবন দেখি’ যবে আসিব নীলাচলে । তবে তুমি আমা-পাশ আসিহ কোন ছলে ॥ ২৪০ ॥

vṛndāvana dekhi’ yabe āsiba nīlācale tabe tumi āmā-pāśa āsiha kona chale

English translation

Translation

“You may see Me at Nīlācala, Jagannātha Purī, when I return after visiting Vṛndāvana. By that time you can think of some trick to escape.

Word meanings

vṛndāvana dekhi’ — after visiting Vṛndāvana ; yabe — when ; āsiba — I shall come back ; nīlācale — to Jagannātha Purī ; tabe — at that time ; tumi — you ; āmā - pāśa — to Me ; āsiha — please come ; kona chale — by some pretext .

Madhya-lila 16.241

Source

সে ছল সেকালে কৃষ্ণ স্ফুরাবে তোমারে । কৃষ্ণকৃপা যাঁরে, তারে কে রাখিতে পারে ॥” ২৪১ ॥

se chala se-kāle kṛṣṇa sphurābe tomāre kṛṣṇa-kṛpā yāṅre, tāre ke rākhite pāre”

English translation

Translation

“What kind of means you will have to use at that time will be revealed by Kṛṣṇa. If one has Kṛṣṇa’s mercy, no one can check him.”

Word meanings

se chala — that trick ; se - kāle — at that time ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; sphurābe — will show ; tomāre — unto you ; kṛṣṇa - kṛpā — the mercy of Kṛṣṇa ; yāṅre — upon whom ; tāre — him ; ke — who ; rākhite — to keep ; pāre — is able .

Purport

Although Śrīla Raghunātha dāsa was very anxious to join Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, the Lord advised him to wait for the mercy of Lord Kṛṣṇa. He recommended that Raghunātha dāsa keep his Kṛṣṇa consciousness firmly fixed in his heart while externally behaving like an ordinary man. This is a trick for everyone advanced in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. One can live in society like an ordinary human being, but at the same time one’s own business should be to satisfy Kṛṣṇa and spread His glories. A Kṛṣṇa conscious person should not be absorbed in material things, for his only business is the devotional service of the Lord. If one is engaged in this way, Kṛṣṇa will certainly bestow His mercy. As Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu advised Raghunātha dāsa, yathā-yogya viṣaya bhuñja’ anāsakta hañā. The same is repeated, antare niṣṭhā kara, bāhye loka-vyavahāra. This means that one must have no desire within his heart other than to serve Kṛṣṇa. On the basis of such a conviction, one can cultivate Kṛṣṇa consciousness. This is confirmed in the Bhakti-rasāmṛta-sindhu (1.2.200):

laukikī vaidikī vāpi yā kriyā kriyate mune hari-sevānukūlaiva sā kāryā bhaktim icchatā

A devotee may act as an ordinary human being or as a strict follower of Vedic injunctions. In either case, everything he does is favorable for the advancement of devotional service because he is in Kṛṣṇa consciousness.

Madhya-lila 16.242

Source

এত কহি’ মহাপ্রভু তাঁরে বিদায় দিল । ঘরে আসি’ মহাপ্ৰভুর শিক্ষা আচরিল ॥ ২৪২ ॥

eta kahi’ mahāprabhu tāṅre vidāya dila ghare āsi’ mahāprabhura śikṣā ācarila

English translation

Translation

In this way, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu bade farewell to Raghunātha dāsa, who returned home and did exactly what the Lord told him.

Word meanings

eta kahi’ — saying this ; mahāprabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; tāṅre — unto Raghunātha dāsa ; vidāya dila — bade farewell ; ghare āsi’ — returning home ; mahāprabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; śikṣā — the instruction ; ācarila — practiced .

Madhya-lila 16.243

Source

বাহ্য বৈরাগ্য, বাতুলতা সকল ছাড়িয়া । যথাযোগ্য কার্য করে অনাসক্ত হঞা ॥ ২৪৩ ॥

bāhya vairāgya, vātulatā sakala chāḍiyā yathā-yogya kārya kare anāsakta hañā

English translation

Translation

After returning home, Raghunātha dāsa gave up all craziness and external pseudo renunciation and engaged in his household duties without attachment.

Word meanings

bāhya vairāgya — external renunciation ; vātulatā — craziness ; sakala — all ; chāḍiyā — giving up ; yathā - yogya — as it is befitting ; kārya — duties ; kare — performs ; anāsakta hañā — being without attachment .

Madhya-lila 16.244

Source

দেখি’ তাঁর পিতা-মাতা বড় সুখ পাইল । তাঁহার আবরণ কিছু শিথিল হইল ॥ ২৪৪ ॥

dekhi’ tāṅra pitā-mātā baḍa sukha pāila tāṅhāra āvaraṇa kichu śithila ha-ila

English translation

Translation

When Raghunātha dāsa’s father and mother saw that their son was acting like a householder, they became very happy. Because of this, they slackened their guard.

Word meanings

dekhi’ — seeing ; tāṅra — his ; pitā - mātā — father and mother ; baḍa — very much ; sukha — happiness ; pāila — got ; tāṅhāra āvaraṇa — strong vigilance upon him ; kichu — something ; śithila ha - ila — became slackened .

Purport

When Raghunātha dāsa’s father and mother saw that their son was no longer acting like a crazy fellow and was responsibly attending to his duties, they became very happy. The eleven people — five watchmen, four personal servants and two brāhmaṇas — who were guarding him became less strict in their vigilance. When Raghunātha dāsa actually took up his household affairs, his parents reduced the number of guards.

Madhya-lila 16.245-246

Source

ইহাঁ প্রভু একত্র করি’ সব ভক্তগণ । অদ্বৈত-নিত্যানন্দাদি যত ভক্তজন ॥ ২৪৫ ॥ সবা আলিঙ্গন করি’ কহেন গোসাঞি । সবে আজ্ঞা দেহ’ — আমি নীলাচলে যাই ॥ ২৪৬ ॥

ihāṅ prabhu ekatra kari’ saba bhakta-gaṇa advaita-nityānandādi yata bhakta-jana sabā āliṅgana kari’ kahena gosāñi sabe ājñā deha’ — āmi nīlācale yāi

English translation

Translation

Meanwhile, at Śāntipura, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu assembled all His devotees — headed by Advaita Ācārya and Nityānanda Prabhu — embraced them all and asked their permission to return to Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

ihāṅ — here (at Śāntipura) ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ekatra kari’ — assembling in one place ; saba bhakta - gaṇa — all the devotees ; advaita - nityānanda - ādi — headed by Advaita Ācārya and Nityānanda Prabhu ; yata bhakta - jana — all the devotees ; sabā āliṅgana kari’ — embracing every one of them ; kahena gosāñi — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said ; sabe — all of you ; ājñā deha’ — just give Me permission ; āmi — I ; nīlācale — to Nīlācala, Jagannātha Purī ; yāi — may go .

Madhya-lila 16.247

Source

সবার সহিত ইহাঁ আমার হইল মিলন । এ বর্ষ ‘নীলাদ্রি’ কেহ না করিহ গমন ॥ ২৪৭ ॥

sabāra sahita ihāṅ āmāra ha-ila milana e varṣa ‘nīlādri’ keha nā kariha gamana

English translation

Translation

Because He had met them all at Śāntipura, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu requested all the devotees not to go to Jagannātha Purī that year.

Word meanings

sabāra sahita — with everyone ; ihāṅ — here ; āmāra — of Me ; ha - ila — there was ; milana — meeting ; e varṣa — this year ; nīlādri — to Jagannātha Purī ; keha — any of you ; nā — not ; kariha gamana — go .

Madhya-lila 16.248

Source

তাহাঁ হৈতে অবশ্য আমি ‘বৃন্দাবন’ যাব । সবে আজ্ঞা দেহ,’ তবে নির্বিঘ্নে আসিব ॥ ২৪৮ ॥

tāhāṅ haite avaśya āmi ‘vṛndāvana’ yāba sabe ājñā deha’, tabe nirvighne āsiba

English translation

Translation

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu said, “I shall certainly go to Vṛndāvana from Jagannātha Purī. If all of you give Me permission, I shall return here again without difficulty.”

Word meanings

tāhāṅ haite — from there ; avaśya — certainly ; āmi — I ; vṛndāvana yāba — shall go to Vṛndāvana ; sabe — all of you ; ājñā deha’ — give Me permission ; tabe — then ; nirvighne — without disturbance ; āsiba — I shall come back .

Madhya-lila 16.249

Source

মাতার চরণে ধরি’ বহু বিনয় করিল । বৃন্দাবন যাইতে তাঁর আজ্ঞা লইল ॥ ২৪৯ ॥

mātāra caraṇe dhari’ bahu vinaya karila vṛndāvana yāite tāṅra ājñā la-ila

English translation

Translation

Clasping the feet of His mother, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu very humbly requested her permission. Thus she gave Him leave to go to Vṛndāvana.

Word meanings

mātāra — of Śacīmātā ; caraṇe — the feet ; dhari’ — catching ; bahu vinaya karila — submitted most humbly ; vṛndāvana yāite — to go to Vṛndāvana ; tāṅra — her ; ājñā — permission ; la - ila — took .

Madhya-lila 16.250

Source

তবে নবদ্বীপে তাঁরে দিল পাঠাঞা । নীলাদ্রি চলিলা সঙ্গে ভক্তগণ লঞা ॥ ২৫০ ॥

tabe navadvīpe tāṅre dila pāṭhāñā nīlādri calilā saṅge bhakta-gaṇa lañā

English translation

Translation

Śrīmatī Śacīdevī was sent back to Navadvīpa, and the Lord and His devotees started for Jagannātha Purī, Nīlādri.

Word meanings

tabe — thereafter ; navadvīpe — to Navadvīpa ; tāṅre — her ; dila pāṭhāñā — sent back ; nīlādri — to Jagannātha Purī ; calilā — departed ; saṅge — with Him ; bhakta - gaṇa lañā — taking all the devotees .

Madhya-lila 16.251

Source

সেই সব লোক পথে করেন সেবন । সুখে নীলাচল আইলা শচীর নন্দন ॥ ২৫১ ॥

sei saba loka pathe karena sevana sukhe nīlācala āilā śacīra nandana

English translation

Translation

The devotees who accompanied Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu rendered all kinds of service on the way to Nīlācala, Jagannātha Purī. Thus in great happiness the Lord returned.

Word meanings

sei saba loka — all those persons ; pathe — on the road ; karena sevana — rendered all service ; sukhe — in great happiness ; nīlācala — to Jagannātha Purī ; āilā — came back ; śacīra nandana — the son of mother Śacī .

Madhya-lila 16.252

Source

প্রভু আসি’ জগন্নাথ দরশন কৈল । ‘মহাপ্রভু আইলা’ — গ্রামে কোলাহল হৈল ॥ ২৫২ ॥

prabhu āsi’ jagannātha daraśana kaila ‘mahāprabhu āilā’ — grāme kolāhala haila

English translation

Translation

When Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu arrived in Jagannātha Purī, He visited the temple of the Lord. News then spread all over the city that He had returned.

Word meanings

prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āsi’ — returning ; jagannātha — to Lord Jagannātha ; daraśana — visit ; kaila — made ; mahāprabhu āilā — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu has come back ; grāme — in the town ; kolāhala haila — there was great agitation .

Madhya-lila 16.253

Source

আনন্দিত ভক্তগণ আসিয়া মিলিলা । প্রেম-আলিঙ্গন প্রভু সবারে করিলা ॥ ২৫৩ ॥

ānandita bhakta-gaṇa āsiyā mililā prema-āliṅgana prabhu sabāre karilā

English translation

Translation

All the devotees then came and met the Lord with great happiness. The Lord embraced each of them in great ecstatic love.

Word meanings

ānandita — very pleased ; bhakta - gaṇa — all the devotees ; āsiyā — came ; mililā — met ; prema - āliṅgana — embracing in love ; prabhu — the Lord ; sabāre — to all devotees ; karilā — offered .

Madhya-lila 16.254

Source

কাশীমিশ্র, রামানন্দ, প্রদ্যুম্ন, সার্বভৌম । বাণীনাথ, শিখি-আদি যত ভক্তগণ ॥ ২৫৪ ॥

kāśī-miśra, rāmānanda, pradyumna, sārvabhauma vāṇīnātha, śikhi-ādi yata bhakta-gaṇa

English translation

Translation

Kāśī Miśra, Rāmānanda Rāya, Pradyumna, Sārvabhauma Bhaṭṭācārya, Vāṇīnātha Rāya, Śikhi Māhiti and all the other devotees met Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu.

Word meanings

kāśī - miśra — Kāśī Miśra ; rāmānanda — Rāmānanda ; pradyumna — Pradyumna ; sārvabhauma — Sārvabhauma ; vāṇīnātha — Vāṇīnātha ; śikhi - ādi — Śikhi Māhiti and others ; yata bhakta - gaṇa — all the devotees .

Madhya-lila 16.255

Source

গদাধর-পণ্ডিত আসি’ প্রভুরে মিলিলা । সবার অগ্রেতে প্রভু কহিতে লাগিলা ॥ ২৫৫ ॥

gadādhara-paṇḍita āsi’ prabhure mililā sabāra agrete prabhu kahite lāgilā

English translation

Translation

Gadādhara Paṇḍita also came and met the Lord. Then, before all the devotees, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu began to speak as follows.

Word meanings

gadādhara - paṇḍita — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; āsi’ — coming ; prabhure mililā — met the Lord ; sabāra agrete — in front of all the devotees ; prabhu — the Lord ; kahite lāgilā — began to say .

Madhya-lila 16.256

Source

“বৃন্দাবন যাব আমি গৌড়দেশ দিয়া । নিজ-মাতার, গঙ্গার চরণ দেখিয়া ॥ ২৫৬ ॥

‘vṛndāvana yāba āmi gauḍa-deśa diyā nija-mātāra, gaṅgāra caraṇa dekhiyā

English translation

Translation

“It was My decision to go to Vṛndāvana through Bengal in order to see My mother and the river Ganges.

Word meanings

vṛndāvana yāba — shall go to Vṛndāvana ; āmi — I ; gauḍa - deśa diyā — through Bengal ; nija - mātāra — of My own mother ; gaṅgāra — of the river Ganges ; caraṇa — the feet ; dekhiyā — seeing .

Madhya-lila 16.257

Source

এত মতে করি’ কৈলুঁ গৌড়েরে গমন । সহস্রেক সঙ্গে হৈল নিজ-ভক্তগণ ॥ ২৫৭ ॥

eta mate kari’ kailuṅ gauḍere gamana sahasreka saṅge haila nija-bhakta-gaṇa

English translation

Translation

“Thus I went to Bengal, but thousands of devotees began to follow Me.

Word meanings

eta — such ; mate — decision ; kari’ — making ; kailuṅ — I did ; gauḍere — to Bengal ; gamana — going ; sahasreka — thousands of men ; saṅge — with Me ; haila — there were ; nija - bhakta - gaṇa — My own devotees .

Madhya-lila 16.258

Source

লক্ষ লক্ষ লোক আইসে কৌতুক দেখিতে । লোকের সংঘট্টে পথ না পারি চলিতে ॥ ২৫৮ ॥

lakṣa lakṣa loka āise kautuka dekhite lokera saṅghaṭṭe patha nā pāri calite

English translation

Translation

“Many hundreds of thousands of people came to see Me out of curiosity, and due to such a large crowd I could not travel very freely on the road.

Word meanings

lakṣa lakṣa loka — many thousands of people ; āise — came ; kautuka — out of curiosity ; dekhite — to see ; lokera saṅghaṭṭe — by the assembly of so many men ; patha — the road ; nā pāri — I was not able ; calite — to pass through .

Madhya-lila 16.259

Source

যথা রহি, তথা ঘর-প্রাচীর হয় চূর্ণ । যথা নেত্র পড়ে তথা লোক দেখি পূর্ণ ॥ ২৫৯ ॥

yathā rahi, tathā ghara-prācīra haya cūrṇa yathā netra paḍe tathā loka dekhi pūrṇa

English translation

Translation

“Indeed, the crowd was so large that the house and the boundary walls of the house where I stayed were destroyed, and wherever I looked I could see only large crowds.

Word meanings

yathā rahi — wherever I stayed ; tathā — there ; ghara - prācīra — the building and the boundary walls ; haya — became ; cūrṇa — broken ; yathā — wherever ; netra — the eyes ; paḍe — fell ; tathā — there ; loka — people ; dekhi — I see ; pūrṇa — filled .

Madhya-lila 16.260

Source

কষ্টে-সৃষ্ট্যে করি’ গেলাঙ রামকেলি-গ্রাম । আমার ঠাঞি আইলা ‘রূপ’ ‘সনাতন’ নাম ॥ ২৬০ ॥

kaṣṭe-sṛṣṭye kari’ gelāṅa rāmakeli-grāma āmāra ṭhāñi āilā ‘rūpa’ ‘sanātana’ nāma

English translation

Translation

“With great difficulty I went to the town of Rāmakeli, where I met two brothers named Rūpa and Sanātana.

Word meanings

kaṣṭe - sṛṣṭye — with great difficulty ; kari’ — doing ; gelāṅa — I went ; rāmakeli - grāma — to the village of Rāmakeli ; āmāra ṭhāñi — before Me ; āilā — came ; rūpa sanātana nāma — the two brothers named Rūpa and Sanātana .

Madhya-lila 16.261

Source

দুই ভাই — ভক্তরাজ, কৃষ্ণকৃপা-পাত্র । ব্যবহারে — রাজমন্ত্রী হয় রাজপাত্র ॥ ২৬১ ॥

dui bhāi — bhakta-rāja, kṛṣṇa-kṛpā-pātra vyavahāre — rāja-mantrī haya rāja-pātra

English translation

Translation

“These two brothers are great devotees and suitable recipients of Kṛṣṇa’s mercy, but in their ordinary dealings they are government officials, ministers to the King.

Word meanings

dui bhāi — two brothers ; bhakta - rāja — kings of devotees ; kṛṣṇa - kṛpā - pātra — suitable candidates for Kṛṣṇa’s mercy ; vyavahāre — in behavior ; rāja - mantrī — ministers of the government ; haya — are ; rāja - pātra — government officers .

Madhya-lila 16.262

Source

বিদ্যা-ভক্তি-বুদ্ধি-বলে পরম প্রবীণ । তবু আপনাকে মানে তৃণ হৈতে হীন ॥ ২৬২ ॥

vidyā-bhakti-buddhi-bale parama pravīṇa tabu āpanāke māne tṛṇa haite hīna

English translation

Translation

“Śrīla Rūpa and Sanātana are very much experienced in education, devotional service, intelligence and strength, yet they think themselves inferior to straw in the street.

Word meanings

vidyā — education ; bhakti — devotion ; buddhi — and intelligence ; bale — in strength ; parama — very ; pravīṇa — experienced ; tabu — still ; āpanāke — themselves ; māne — they think ; tṛṇa — a straw ; haite — than ; hīna — lower .

Madhya-lila 16.263-264

Source

তাঁর দৈন্য দেখি’ শুনি’ পাষাণ বিদরে । আমি তুষ্ট হঞা তবে কহিলুঁ দোঁহারে ॥ ২৬৩ ॥ “উত্তম হঞা হীন করি’ মানহ আপনারে । অচিরে করিবে কৃষ্ণ তোমার উদ্ধারে ॥” ২৬৪ ॥

tāṅra dainya dekhi’ śuni’ pāṣāṇa vidare āmi tuṣṭa hañā tabe kahiluṅ doṅhāre “uttama hañā hīna kari’ mānaha āpanāre acire karibe kṛṣṇa tomāra uddhāre”

English translation

Translation

“Indeed, the humility of these two brothers could even melt stone. Because I was very pleased with their behavior, I told them, ‘Although you are both very much exalted, you consider yourselves inferior, and because of this, Kṛṣṇa will very soon deliver you.’

Word meanings

tāṅra dainya dekhi’ — by seeing their humility ; śuni’ — or even hearing about it ; pāṣāṇa — stone ; vidare — becomes melted ; āmi — I ; tuṣṭa hañā — being very pleased ; tabe — then ; kahiluṅ doṅhāre — said to both of them ; uttama hañā — being actually superior in every respect ; hīna — inferior ; kari’ — proposing as ; mānaha — you accept ; āpanāre — yourselves ; acire — very soon ; karibe — will do ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; tomāra — of you ; uddhāre — liberation .

Purport

Such are the qualifications of a pure devotee. Materially one may be very opulent, experienced, influential and educated, but if one still thinks himself lower than straw in the street, one attracts the attention of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu or Lord Kṛṣṇa. Although Mahārāja Pratāparudra was a king, he took up a broom to cleanse the road for Lord Jagannātha’s ratha (chariot). Because of this humble service, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu was very pleased with the King, and for that reason the Lord embraced him. According to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s instructions, a devotee should never be puffed up by material power. He should know that material power is the result of one’s past good activities ( karma ) and is consequently transient. At any moment all one’s material opulence can be finished; therefore a devotee is never proud of such opulence. He is always humble and meek, considering himself lower than a piece of straw. Because of this, the devotees are eligible to return home, back to Godhead.

Madhya-lila 16.265-266

Source

এত কহি’ আমি যবে বিদায় তাঁরে দিল । গমনকালে সনাতন ‘প্রহেলী’ কহিল ॥ ২৬৫ ॥ যাঁর সঙ্গে হয় এই লোক লক্ষ কোটি । বৃন্দাবন যাইবার এই নহে পরিপাটী ॥ ২৬৬ ॥

eta kahi’ āmi yabe vidāya tāṅre dila gamana-kāle sanātana ‘prahelī’ kahila yāṅra saṅge haya ei loka lakṣa koṭi vṛndāvana yāibāra ei nahe paripāṭī

English translation

Translation

“After speaking to them in this way, I bade them farewell. As I was leaving, Sanātana told Me, ‘It is not appropriate for one to be followed by a crowd of thousands when going to Vṛndāvana.’

Word meanings

eta kahi’ — saying this ; āmi — I ; yabe — when ; vidāya — farewell ; tāṅre — unto them ; dila — gave ; gamana - kāle — while going ; sanātana — Sanātana ; prahelī — enigma ; kahila — said ; yāṅra saṅge — with whom ; haya — is ; ei — this ; loka — crowd of people ; lakṣa koṭi — hundreds of thousands ; vṛndāvana — to Vṛndāvana-dhāma ; yāibāra — for going ; ei — this ; nahe — not ; paripāṭī — the method .

Madhya-lila 16.267

Source

তবু আমি শুনিলুঁ মাত্র, না কৈলুঁ অবধান । প্রাতে চলি’ আইলাঙ ‘কানাইর নাটশালা’-গ্রাম ॥ ২৬৭ ॥

tabu āmi śuniluṅ mātra, nā kailuṅ avadhāna prāte cali’ āilāṅa ‘kānāira nāṭaśālā’-grāma

English translation

Translation

“Although I heard this, I did not pay it any attention, and in the morning I went to the place named Kānāi Nāṭaśālā.

Word meanings

tabu — still ; āmi — I ; śuniluṅ — heard ; mātra — only ; nā — not ; kailuṅ — paid ; avadhāna — any attention ; prāte — in the morning ; cali’ āilāṅa — I walked ; kānāira nāṭaśālā — to Kānāi Nāṭaśālā ; grāma — the place .

Madhya-lila 16.268

Source

রাত্রিকালে মনে আমি বিচার করিল । সনাতন মোরে কিবা ‘প্রহেলী’ কহিল ॥ ২৬৮ ॥

rātri-kāle mane āmi vicāra karila sanātana more kibā ‘prahelī’ kahila

English translation

Translation

“At night, however, I considered what Sanātana had told Me.

Word meanings

rātri - kāle — at night ; mane — in the mind ; āmi — I ; vicāra karila — considered ; sanātana — Sanātana ; more — unto Me ; kibā — what ; prahelī — enigma ; kahila — spoke .

Madhya-lila 16.269

Source

ভালত’ কহিল, — মোর এত লোক সঙ্গে । লোক দেখি’ কহিবে মোরে — ‘এই এক ঢঙ্গে’ ॥ ২৬৯ ॥

bhālata’ kahila, — mora eta loka saṅge loka dekhi’ kahibe more — ‘ei eka ḍhaṅge’

English translation

Translation

“I decided that Sanātana had spoken very well. I was certainly being followed by a large crowd, and when people would see so many men, they would surely rebuke Me, saying, ‘Here is another imposter.’

Word meanings

bhālata’ kahila — he has spoken very well ; mora — of Me ; eta — so much ; loka — crowd ; saṅge — in the company ; loka — the people ; dekhi’ — seeing ; kahibe more — will speak about Me ; ei — this ; eka — one ; ḍhaṅge — imposter .

Madhya-lila 16.270

Source

‘দুর্লভ’ ‘দুর্গম’ সেই ‘নির্জন’ বৃন্দাবন । একাকী যাইব, কিবা সঙ্গে একজন ॥ ২৭০ ॥

‘durlabha’ ‘durgama’ sei ‘nirjana’ vṛndāvana ekākī yāiba, kibā saṅge eka-jana

English translation

Translation

“I then began to consider that Vṛndāvana is a very solitary place. It is invincible and very difficult to attain. I therefore decided to go there alone or, at the utmost, with only one person.

Word meanings

durlabha — very rare ; durgama — invincible ; sei — that ; nirjana — solitary ; vṛndāvana — the land of Vṛndāvana ; ekākī — alone ; yāiba — I shall go ; kibā — or ; saṅge — with Me ; eka - jana — only one person .

Madhya-lila 16.271

Source

মাধবেন্দ্রপুরী তথা গেলা ‘একেশ্বরে’ । দুগ্ধদান-চ্ছলে কৃষ্ণ সাক্ষাৎ দিল তাঁরে ॥ ২৭১ ॥

mādhavendra-purī tathā gelā ‘ekeśvare’ dugdha-dāna-cchale kṛṣṇa sākṣāt dila tāṅre

English translation

Translation

“Mādhavendra Purī went to Vṛndāvana alone, and Kṛṣṇa, on the pretext of giving him milk, granted him an audience.

Word meanings

mādhavendra - purī — Mādhavendra Purī ; tathā — there ; gelā — went ; ekeśvare — alone ; dugdha - dāna - chale — on the plea of giving milk in charity ; kṛṣṇa — Lord Kṛṣṇa ; sākṣāt — direct audience ; dila — gave ; tāṅre — unto him .

Madhya-lila 16.272

Source

বাদিয়ার বাজি পাতি’ চলিলাঙ তথারে । বহু-সঙ্গে বৃন্দাবন গমন না করে ॥ ২৭২ ॥

bādiyāra bāji pāti’ calilāṅa tathāre bahu-saṅge vṛndāvana gamana nā kare

English translation

Translation

“I then understood that I was going to Vṛndāvana like a magician with his show, and this is certainly not good. No one should go to Vṛndāvana with so many men.

Word meanings

bādiyāra — of a gypsy ; bāji — the magic ; pāti’ — demonstrating ; calilāṅa — I went ; tathāre — there ; bahu - saṅge — with many men ; vṛndāvana — to Vṛndāvana dhāma ; gamana — going ; nā kare — no one does .

Madhya-lila 16.273

Source

একা যাইব, কিবা সঙ্গে ভৃত্য একজন । তবে সে শোভয় বৃন্দাবনের গমন ॥ ২৭৩ ॥

ekā yāiba, kibā saṅge bhṛtya eka-jana tabe se śobhaya vṛndāvanera gamana

English translation

Translation

“I have therefore resolved to go alone or, at the utmost, with one servant. In this way, My journey to Vṛndāvana will be beautiful.

Word meanings

ekā yāiba — I shall go alone ; kibā — or ; saṅge — with Me ; bhṛtya — servant ; eka - jana — one ; tabe — in that way ; se — that ; śobhaya — is beautiful ; vṛndāvanera gamana — going to Vṛndāvana .

Madhya-lila 16.274

Source

বৃন্দাবন যাব কাহাঁ ‘একাকী’ হঞা ! সৈন্য সঙ্গে চলিয়াছি ঢাক বাজাঞা ! ২৭৪ ॥

vṛndāvana yāba kāhāṅ ‘ekākī’ hañā! sainya saṅge caliyāchi ḍhāka bājāñā!

English translation

Translation

“I thought, ‘Instead of going to Vṛndāvana alone, I am going with soldiers and the beating of drums.’

Word meanings

vṛndāvana yāba — I should go to Vṛndāvana ; kāhāṅ — whereas ; ekākī hañā — being alone ; sainya — soldiers ; saṅge — along with ; caliyāchi — I am going ; ḍhāka bājāñā — beating the drum .

Madhya-lila 16.275

Source

ধিক্ ধিক্ আপনাকে বলি’ হইলাঙ অস্থির । নিবৃত্ত হঞা পুনঃ আইলাঙ গঙ্গাতীর ॥ ২৭৫ ॥

dhik, dhik āpanāke bali’ ha-ilāṅa asthira nivṛtta hañā punaḥ āilāṅa gaṅgā-tīra

English translation

Translation

“I therefore said, ‘Fie upon Me!’ and being very much agitated, I returned to the banks of the Ganges.

Word meanings

dhik dhik — fie! fie! ; āpanāke — on Myself ; bali’ — saying ; ha - ilāṅa — I became ; asthira — agitated ; nivṛtta hañā — stopping such an action ; punaḥ — again ; āilāṅa — I came back ; gaṅgā - tīra — to the bank of the Ganges .

Madhya-lila 16.276

Source

ভক্তগণে রাখিয়া আইনু নিজ নিজ স্থানে । আমা-সঙ্গে আইলা সবে পাঁচ-ছয় জনে ॥ ২৭৬ ॥

bhakta-gaṇe rākhiyā āinu nija nija sthāne āmā-saṅge āilā sabe pāṅca-chaya jane

English translation

Translation

“I then left all the devotees there and brought only five or six persons with Me.

Word meanings

bhakta - gaṇe — the devotees ; rākhiyā — keeping ; āinu — I came ; nija nija sthāne — in their respective places ; āmā - saṅge — with Me ; āilā — came ; sabe — only ; pāṅca - chaya jane — five or six men .

Madhya-lila 16.277

Source

নির্বিঘ্নে এবে কৈছে যাইব বৃন্দাবনে । সবে মেলি’ যুক্তি দেহ’ হঞা পরসন্নে ॥ ২৭৭ ॥

nirvighne ebe kaiche yāiba vṛndāvane sabe meli’ yukti deha’ hañā parasanne

English translation

Translation

“Now I wish that you all will be pleased with Me and give Me good consultation. Tell Me how I shall be able to go to Vṛndāvana without impediments.

Word meanings

nirvighne — without obstacles ; ebe — now ; kaiche — how ; yāiba — I shall go ; vṛndāvane — to Vṛndāvana ; sabe meli’ — altogether ; yukti deha’ — give Me consultation ; hañā parasanne — being very pleased with Me .

Madhya-lila 16.278

Source

গদাধরে ছাড়ি’ গেনু, ইঁহো দুঃখ পাইল । সেই হেতু বৃন্দাবন যাইতে নারিল ॥” ২৭৮ ॥

gadādhare chāḍi’ genu, iṅho duḥkha pāila sei hetu vṛndāvana yāite nārila

English translation

Translation

“I left Gadādhara Paṇḍita here, and he became very unhappy. For this reason I could not go to Vṛndāvana.”

Word meanings

gadādhare chāḍi’ — leaving aside Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; genu — I went ; iṅho — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; duḥkha pāila — became unhappy ; sei hetu — for that reason ; vṛndāvana — to Vṛndāvana-dhāma ; yāite nārila — I was unable to go .

Madhya-lila 16.279

Source

তবে গদাধর-পণ্ডিত প্রেমাবিষ্ট হঞা । প্রভু-পদ ধরি’ কহে বিনয় করিয়া ॥ ২৭৯ ॥

tabe gadādhara-paṇḍita premāviṣṭa hañā prabhu-pada dhari’ kahe vinaya kariyā

English translation

Translation

Being encouraged by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s words, Gadādhara Paṇḍita became absorbed in ecstatic love. Immediately clasping the lotus feet of the Lord, he began to speak with great humility.

Word meanings

tabe — thereupon ; gadādhara paṇḍita — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; prema - āviṣṭa hañā — being absorbed in ecstatic love ; prabhu - pada dhari’ — catching hold of the lotus feet of the Lord ; kahe — says ; vinaya kariyā — with great humility .

Madhya-lila 16.280

Source

“তুমি যাহাঁ-যাহাঁ রহ, তাহাঁ ‘বৃন্দাবন’ । তাহাঁ যমুনা, গঙ্গা, সর্বতীর্থগণ ॥ ২৮০ ॥

tumi yāhāṅ-yāhāṅ raha, tāhāṅ ‘vṛndāvana’ tāhāṅ yamunā, gaṅgā, sarva-tīrtha-gaṇa

English translation

Translation

Gadādhara Paṇḍita said, “Wherever You stay is Vṛndāvana, as well as the river Yamunā, the river Ganges and all other places of pilgrimage.

Word meanings

tumi — You ; yāhāṅ - yāhāṅ — wherever ; raha — stay ; tāhāṅ vṛndāvana — that place is Vṛndāvana ; tāhāṅ — there ; yamunā — the river Yamunā ; gaṅgā — the river Gaṅgā ; sarva - tīrtha - gaṇa — all other holy places of pilgrimage .

Madhya-lila 16.281

Source

তবু বৃন্দাবন যাহ’ লোক শিখাইতে । সেইত করিবে, তোমার যেই লয় চিত্তে ॥ ২৮১ ॥

tabu vṛndāvana yāha’ loka śikhāite seita karibe, tomāra yei laya citte

English translation

Translation

“Although wherever You stay is Vṛndāvana, You will still go to Vṛndāvana just to instruct people. Otherwise, You will do whatever You think best.”

Word meanings

tabu — still ; vṛndāvana yāha’ — You go to Vṛndāvana ; loka śikhāite — to teach the people in general ; seita — that ; karibe — You will do ; tomāra — of You ; yei — what ; laya — takes ; citte — in the mind .

Purport

It was not essential for Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu to go to Vṛndāvana, for wherever He stayed was immediately converted to Vṛndāvana. Indeed, at that place were also the river Ganges, the river Yamunā and all other places of pilgrimage. This was also expressed by Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu Himself when He danced in the Ratha-yātrā. At that time He said that His very mind was Vṛndāvana ( mora-mana — vṛndāvana ) . Because His mind was Vṛndāvana, all the pastimes of Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa were taking place within Himself. Nonetheless, just to teach people, He visited bhauma-vṛndāvana, Vṛndāvana-dhāma in this material world. In this way the Lord instructed everyone to visit Vṛndāvana-dhāma, which is a very holy place.

Materialists consider Vṛndāvana-dhāma an unclean city because there are many monkeys and dogs there, and along the bank of the Yamunā there is refuse. Some time ago, a materialistic man asked me, “Why are you living in Vṛndāvana? Why have you selected such a dirty place to live after retiring?” Such a person cannot understand that the earthly Vṛndāvana-dhāma is always a representation of the original Vṛndāvana-dhāma. Consequently Vṛndāvana-dhāma is as worshipable as Lord Kṛṣṇa. Ārādhyo bhagavān vrajeśa-tanayas tad-dhāma vṛndāvanam: according to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s philosophy, Lord Śrī Kṛṣṇa and His abode, Vṛndāvana, are equally worshipable. Sometimes materialistic people who have no spiritual understanding go to Vṛndāvana as tourists. One who goes to Vṛndāvana with such materialistic vision cannot derive any spiritual benefit. Such a person is not convinced that Kṛṣṇa and Vṛndāvana are identical. Since they are identical, Vṛndāvana is as worshipable as Lord Kṛṣṇa. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s vision ( mora-mana — vṛndāvana ) is different from the vision of an ordinary materialistic person. At the Ratha-yātrā festival, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, absorbed in the ecstasy of Śrīmatī Rādhārāṇī, dragged Lord Kṛṣṇa back to Vṛndāvana-dhāma. Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu spoke of this in the verses beginning āhuś ca te ( Madhya 13.136).

In Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (10.84.13) it is stated:

yasyātma-buddhiḥ kuṇape tri-dhātuke sva-dhīḥ kalatrādiṣu bhauma ijya-dhīḥ yat-tīrtha-buddhiḥ salile na karhicij janeṣv abhijñeṣu sa eva go-kharaḥ

“A human being who identifies the body made of three elements with his self, who considers the by-products of the body to be his kinsmen, who considers the land of birth as worshipable, and who goes to a place of pilgrimage simply to take a bath rather than meet men of transcendental knowledge there is to be considered like an ass or a cow.”

Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu personally renovated Vṛndāvana-dhāma and advised His chief disciples, Rūpa and Sanātana, to develop it and open it to attract the spiritual vision of the general populace. At present there are about five thousand temples in Vṛndāvana, and still our society, the International Society for Krishna Consciousness, is constructing a huge, magnificent temple for the worship of Lord Kṛṣṇa and Lord Balarāma, along with Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa and Guru-Gaurāṅga. Since there is no prominent Kṛṣṇa-Balarāma temple in Vṛndāvana, we are attempting to construct one so that people will be attracted to Kṛṣṇa-Balarāma, or Nitāi-Gauracandra. Vrajendra-nandana yei, śacī suta haila sei. Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura says that Balarāma and the son of Mahārāja Nanda have advented Themselves as Gaura-Nitāi. To propagate this fundamental principle, we are establishing a Kṛṣṇa-Balarāma temple to broadcast to the world that worship of Gaura-Nitāi is the same as worship of Kṛṣṇa-Balarāma.

Although it is very difficult to enter into the Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa pastimes, most of the devotees of Vṛndāvana are attracted to the rādhā-kṛṣṇa-līlā. However, since Nitāi-Gauracandra are direct incarnations of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, we can be directly in touch with Lord Balarāma and Lord Kṛṣṇa through Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu and Nityānanda Prabhu. Those who are highly elevated in Kṛṣṇa consciousness can enter into the pastimes of Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa through the mercy of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. It is said, śrī-kṛṣṇa-caitanya rādhā-kṛṣṇa nahe anya: “Śrī Kṛṣṇa Caitanya Mahāprabhu is a combination of Rādhā and Kṛṣṇa.”

Sometimes materialists, forgetting the pastimes of Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa and Kṛṣṇa-Balarāma, go to Vṛndāvana, accept the land’s spiritual facilities and engage in material activity. This is against the teachings of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu. The prākṛta-sahajiyās proclaim themselves vraja-vāsīs or dhāma-vāsīs, but they are mainly engaged in sense gratification. Thus they become more and more implicated in the materialistic way of life. Those who are pure devotees in Kṛṣṇa consciousness condemn their activities. The eternal vraja-vāsīs like Svarūpa Dāmodara did not even come to Vṛndāvana-dhāma. Śrī Puṇḍarīka Vidyānidhi, Śrī Haridāsa Ṭhākura, Śrīvāsa Paṇḍita, Śivānanda Sena, Śrī Rāmānanda Rāya, Śrī Śikhi Māhiti, Śrī Mādhavīdevī and Śrī Gadādhara Paṇḍita Gosvāmī never visited Vṛndāvana-dhāma. Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvatī Ṭhākura points out that we have no authorized documents stating that these exalted personalities visited Vṛndāvana. Nonetheless, we find many nondevotees, Māyāvādī sannyāsīs, prākṛta-sahajiyās, fruitive workers, mental speculators and many others with material motives going to Vṛndāvana to live. Many of these people go there to solve their economic problems by becoming beggars. Although anyone living in Vṛndāvana somehow or other is benefited, the real Vṛndāvana is appreciated only by a pure devotee. As stated in the Brahma-saṁhitā, premāñjana-cchurita-bhakti-vilocanena. When one has purified eyes, he can see that Śrī Vṛndāvana and the original Goloka Vṛndāvana planet in the spiritual sky are identical.

Śrīla Narottama dāsa Ṭhākura, Śrīnivāsa Ācārya, Śrī Jagannātha dāsa Bābājī Mahārāja, Śrī Bhagavān dāsa Bābājī Mahārāja and Śrīla Gaurakiśora dāsa Bābājī Mahārāja, and later Śrī Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura of Calcutta, always engaged in nāma-bhajana and certainly did not live anywhere but Vṛndāvana. Presently, the members of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement throughout the world live in materially opulent cities, such as London, New York, Los Angeles, Paris, Moscow, Zurich and Stockholm. However, we are satisfied with following in the footsteps of Śrīla Bhaktivinoda Ṭhākura and other ācāryas. Because we live in the temples of Rādhā-Kṛṣṇa and continuously hold hari-nāma-saṅkīrtana — the chanting of Hare Kṛṣṇa — we consequently live in Vṛndāvana and nowhere else. We are also following in the footsteps of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu by attempting to construct a temple in Vṛndāvana for our disciples throughout the world to visit.

Madhya-lila 16.282

Source

এই আগে আইলা, প্রভু, বর্ষার চারি মাস । এই চারি মাস কর নীলাচলে বাস ॥ ২৮২ ॥

ei āge āilā, prabhu, varṣāra cāri māsa ei cāri māsa kara nīlācale vāsa

English translation

Translation

Taking this opportunity, Gadādhara Paṇḍita said, “Just now the four months of the rainy season have begun. You should therefore spend the next four months in Jagannātha Purī.

Word meanings

ei — just ; āge — ahead ; āilā — have come ; prabhu — my Lord ; varṣāra cāri māsa — the four months of the rainy season ; ei cāri māsa — these four months ; kara — just do ; nīlācale — at Jagannātha Purī ; vāsa — living .

Madhya-lila 16.283

Source

পাছে সেই আচরিবা, যেই তোমার মন । আপন-ইচ্ছায় চল, রহ, — কে করে বারণ ॥” ২৮৩ ॥

pāche sei ācaribā, yei tomāra mana āpana-icchāya cala, raha, — ke kare vāraṇa”

English translation

Translation

“After remaining here for four months, You will be free to do as You like. Actually, no one can stop You from going or remaining.”

Word meanings

pāche — thereafter ; sei — that ; ācaribā — You will do ; yei — what ; tomāra mana — You like ; āpana - icchāya — by Your sweet will ; cala — You always go ; raha — You remain ; ke — who ; kare vāraṇa — can stop You .

Madhya-lila 16.284

Source

শুনি’ সব ভক্ত কহে প্রভুর চরণে । সবাকার ইচ্ছা পণ্ডিত কৈল নিবেদনে ॥ ২৮৪ ॥

śuni’ saba bhakta kahe prabhura caraṇe sabākāra icchā paṇḍita kaila nivedane

English translation

Translation

Upon hearing this statement, the devotees present at the lotus feet of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu stated that Gadādhara Paṇḍita had properly presented their desire.

Word meanings

śuni’ — hearing ; saba — all ; bhakta — devotees ; kahe — said ; prabhura caraṇe — unto the lotus feet of the Lord ; sabākāra icchā — everyone’s desire ; paṇḍita — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; kaila — has made ; nivedane — submission .

Madhya-lila 16.285

Source

সবার ইচ্ছায় প্রভু চারি মাস রহিলা । শুনিয়া প্রতাপরুদ্র আনন্দিত হৈলা ॥ ২৮৫ ॥

sabāra icchāya prabhu cāri māsa rahilā śuniyā pratāparudra ānandita hailā

English translation

Translation

Being requested by all the devotees, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu agreed to remain at Jagannātha Purī for four months. Hearing this, King Pratāparudra became very happy.

Word meanings

sabāra icchāya — because of everyone’s desire ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; cāri māsa — for four months ; rahilā — remained ; śuniyā — hearing ; pratāparudra — King Pratāparudra ; ānandita hailā — became very, very happy .

Madhya-lila 16.286

Source

সেই দিন গদাধর কৈল নিমন্ত্রণ । তাহাঁ ভিক্ষা কৈল প্রভু লঞা ভক্তগণ ॥ ২৮৬ ॥

sei dina gadādhara kaila nimantraṇa tāhāṅ bhikṣā kaila prabhu lañā bhakta-gaṇa

English translation

Translation

That day Gadādhara Paṇḍita extended an invitation to Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu, and the Lord took His lunch at his place with the other devotees.

Word meanings

sei dina — that day ; gadādhara — Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; kaila nimantraṇa — gave an invitation ; tāhāṅ — at his place ; bhikṣā kaila — took lunch ; prabhu — Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; lañā — with ; bhakta - gaṇa — His devotees .

Madhya-lila 16.287

Source

ভিক্ষাতে পণ্ডিতের স্নেহ, প্রভুর আস্বাদন । মনুষ্যের শক্ত্যে দুই না যায় বর্ণন ॥ ২৮৭ ॥

bhikṣāte paṇḍitera sneha, prabhura āsvādana manuṣyera śaktye dui nā yāya varṇana

English translation

Translation

No ordinary human being can possibly describe Gadādhara Paṇḍita’s affectionate presentation of food or Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu’s tasting this food.

Word meanings

bhikṣāte — in feeding ; paṇḍitera — of Gadādhara Paṇḍita ; sneha — the affection ; prabhura — of Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; āsvādana — tasting ; manuṣyera — of an ordinary human being ; śaktye — in the power ; dui — these two ; nā yāya — not possible ; varṇana — the description .

Madhya-lila 16.288

Source

এই মত গৌরলীলা — অনন্ত, অপার । সংক্ষেপে কহিয়ে, কহা না যায় বিস্তার ॥ ২৮৮ ॥

ei mata gaura-līlā — ananta, apāra saṅkṣepe kahiye, kahā nā yāya vistāra

English translation

Translation

In this way, Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu performs His pastimes, which are unlimited and unfathomable. Somehow or other, these have briefly been described. It is not possible to describe them elaborately.

Word meanings

ei mata — in this way ; gaura - līlā — pastimes of Lord Śrī Caitanya Mahāprabhu ; ananta — unlimited ; apāra — unfathomed ; saṅkṣepe — in brief ; kahiye — I describe ; kahā — describing ; nā yāya vistāra — no one can do so elaborately and completely .

Madhya-lila 16.289

Source

সহস্র-বদনে কহে আপনে ‘অনন্ত’ । তবু এক লীলার তেঁহো নাহি পায় অন্ত ॥ ২৮৯ ॥

sahasra-vadane kahe āpane ‘ananta’ tabu eka līlāra teṅho nāhi pāya anta

English translation

Translation

Although Lord Anantadeva is always describing the pastimes of the Lord with His thousands of mouths, He cannot reach the end of even one of the Lord’s pastimes.

Word meanings

sahasra - vadane — in thousands of mouths ; kahe — speaks ; āpane — personally ; ananta — Anantadeva ; tabu — still ; eka līlāra — of one pastime only ; teṅho — He (Anantadeva) ; nāhi — not ; pāya — gets ; anta — the end .

Madhya-lila 16.290

Source

শ্রী রূপ-রঘুনাথ-পদে যার আশ । চৈতন্যচরিতামৃত কহে কৃষ্ণদাস ॥ ২৯০ ॥

śrī-rūpa-raghunātha pade yāra āśa caitanya-caritāmṛta kahe kṛṣṇadāsa

English translation

Translation

Praying at the lotus feet of Śrī Rūpa and Śrī Raghunātha, always desiring their mercy, I, Kṛṣṇadāsa, narrate Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta, following in their footsteps.

Word meanings

śrī - rūpa — Śrīla Rūpa Gosvāmī ; raghunātha — Śrīla Raghunātha dāsa Gosvāmī ; pade — at the lotus feet ; yāra — whose ; āśa — expectation ; caitanya - caritāmṛta — the book named Caitanya-caritāmṛta ; kahe — describes ; kṛṣṇadāsa — Śrīla Kṛṣṇadāsa Kavirāja Gosvāmī .

Purport

Thus end the Bhaktivedanta purports to Śrī Caitanya-caritāmṛta, Madhya-līlā, sixteenth chapter, describing Lord Caitanya’s attempt to go to Vṛndāvana.